Cleaning of sources (Univ related files). -1/TRUE/FALSE/wxIDY_ANY/wxDefaultCoord/whitespaces/!! issues.
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@28748 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
		@@ -49,9 +49,9 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
        wxBitmapButtonBase::SetMargins(x, y);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetCurrent(bool doit = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetCurrent(bool doit = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Press();
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Release();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnSetBitmap();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // set bitmap to the given one if it's ok or to m_bmpNormal and return
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE if the bitmap really changed
 | 
			
		||||
    // true if the bitmap really changed
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ChangeBitmap(const wxBitmap& bmp);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
private:
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool DoDrawBackground(wxDC& dc);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // common part of all ctors
 | 
			
		||||
    void Init();
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -22,8 +22,8 @@
 | 
			
		||||
// the actions supported by wxCheckBox
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CHECK   _T("check")   // SetValue(TRUE)
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CLEAR   _T("clear")   // SetValue(FALSE)
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CHECK   _T("check")   // SetValue(true)
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CLEAR   _T("clear")   // SetValue(false)
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxACTION_CHECKBOX_TOGGLE  _T("toggle")  // toggle the check state
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// additionally it accepts wxACTION_BUTTON_PRESS and RELEASE
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // overridden base class virtuals
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsPressed() const { return m_isPressed; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxSize DoGetBestClientSize() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the size of the bitmap using either the current one or the default
 | 
			
		||||
    // one (query renderer then)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // implement check list box methods
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsChecked(size_t item) const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Check(size_t item, bool check = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Check(size_t item, bool check = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // and input handling
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // called before showing the control to set the initial selection - notice
 | 
			
		||||
    // that the text passed to this method might not correspond to any valid
 | 
			
		||||
    // item (if the user edited it directly), in which case the method should
 | 
			
		||||
    // just return FALSE but not emit any errors
 | 
			
		||||
    // just return false but not emit any errors
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetSelection(const wxString& value) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called immediately after the control is shown
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    void ShowPopup();
 | 
			
		||||
    void HidePopup();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the popup is currently shown
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the popup is currently shown
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsPopupShown() const { return m_isPopupShown; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the popup window containing the popup control
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -159,8 +159,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnDismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // forward these functions to all subcontrols
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Show(bool show = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Show(bool show = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void DoSetToolTip( wxToolTip *tip );
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -49,16 +49,16 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // is the dialog in modal state right now?
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsModal() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // For now, same as Show(TRUE) but returns return code
 | 
			
		||||
    // For now, same as Show(true) but returns return code
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int ShowModal();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // may be called to terminate the dialog with the given return code
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void EndModal(int retCode);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // returns TRUE if we're in a modal loop
 | 
			
		||||
    // returns true if we're in a modal loop
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsModalShowing() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool Show(bool show = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    bool Show(bool show = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // implementation only from now on
 | 
			
		||||
    // -------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxString& name = wxFrameNameStr);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxPoint GetClientAreaOrigin() const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_STATUSBAR
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxStatusBar* CreateStatusBar(int number = 1,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TOOLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
    // create main toolbar bycalling OnCreateToolBar()
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxToolBar* CreateToolBar(long style = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     wxWindowID id = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     wxWindowID id = wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     const wxString& name = wxToolBarNameStr);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void PositionToolBar();
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_TOOLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -47,8 +47,8 @@
 | 
			
		||||
class WXDLLEXPORT wxInputHandler : public wxObject
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // map a keyboard event to one or more actions (pressed == TRUE if the key
 | 
			
		||||
    // was pressed, FALSE if released), returns TRUE if something was done
 | 
			
		||||
    // map a keyboard event to one or more actions (pressed == true if the key
 | 
			
		||||
    // was pressed, false if released), returns true if something was done
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                           const wxKeyEvent& event,
 | 
			
		||||
                           bool pressed) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -67,12 +67,12 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // HandleMouseMove() as the mouse maybe over the control without it having
 | 
			
		||||
    // focus
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE to refresh the control, FALSE otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true to refresh the control, false otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer, const wxFocusEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // react to the app getting/losing activation
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE to refresh the control, FALSE otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true to refresh the control, false otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer, bool activated);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // virtual dtor for any base class
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -94,23 +94,23 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                           bool pressed)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleKey(consumer, event, pressed)
 | 
			
		||||
                         : FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                         : false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                             const wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleMouse(consumer, event) : FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleMouse(consumer, event) : false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer, const wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleMouseMove(consumer, event) : FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleMouseMove(consumer, event) : false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer, const wxFocusEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleFocus(consumer, event) : FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_handler ? m_handler->HandleFocus(consumer, event) : false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
private:
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsSelected(int n) const
 | 
			
		||||
        { return m_selections.Index(n) != wxNOT_FOUND; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetSelection(int n, bool select = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetSelection(int n, bool select = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetSelection() const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetSelections(wxArrayInt& aSelections) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -147,10 +147,10 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    void Activate(int item = -1);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // select or unselect the specified or current (if -1) item
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoSelect(int item = -1, bool sel = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoSelect(int item = -1, bool sel = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // more readable wrapper
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoUnselect(int item) { DoSelect(item, FALSE); }
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoUnselect(int item) { DoSelect(item, false); }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // select an item and send a notification about it
 | 
			
		||||
    void SelectAndNotify(int item);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -159,10 +159,10 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void EnsureVisible(int n);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // find the first item [strictly] after the current one which starts with
 | 
			
		||||
    // the given string and make it the current one, return TRUE if the current
 | 
			
		||||
    // the given string and make it the current one, return true if the current
 | 
			
		||||
    // item changed
 | 
			
		||||
    bool FindItem(const wxString& prefix, bool strictlyAfter = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    bool FindNextItem(const wxString& prefix) { return FindItem(prefix, TRUE); }
 | 
			
		||||
    bool FindItem(const wxString& prefix, bool strictlyAfter = false);
 | 
			
		||||
    bool FindNextItem(const wxString& prefix) { return FindItem(prefix, true); }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // extend the selection to span the range from the anchor (see below) to
 | 
			
		||||
    // the specified or current item
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -306,11 +306,11 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxStdListboxInputHandler : public wxStdInputHandler
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // if pressing the mouse button in a multiselection listbox should toggle
 | 
			
		||||
    // the item under mouse immediately, then specify TRUE as the second
 | 
			
		||||
    // the item under mouse immediately, then specify true as the second
 | 
			
		||||
    // parameter (this is the standard behaviour, under GTK the item is toggled
 | 
			
		||||
    // only when the mouse is released in the multi selection listbox)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxStdListboxInputHandler(wxInputHandler *inphand,
 | 
			
		||||
                             bool toggleOnPressAlways = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                             bool toggleOnPressAlways = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // base class methods
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // parts of HitTest(): first finds the pseudo (because not in range) index
 | 
			
		||||
    // of the item and the second one adjusts it if necessary - that is if the
 | 
			
		||||
    // third one returns FALSE
 | 
			
		||||
    // third one returns false
 | 
			
		||||
    int HitTestUnsafe(const wxListBox *listbox, const wxMouseEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
    int FixItemIndex(const wxListBox *listbox, int item);
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsValidIndex(const wxListBox *listbox, int item);
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // show this menu at the given position (in screen coords) and optionally
 | 
			
		||||
    // select its first item
 | 
			
		||||
    void Popup(const wxPoint& pos, const wxSize& size,
 | 
			
		||||
               bool selectFirst = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
               bool selectFirst = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // dismiss the menu
 | 
			
		||||
    void Dismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -65,11 +65,11 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // implementation only from here
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // do as if this item were clicked, return TRUE if the resulting event was
 | 
			
		||||
    // processed, FALSE otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    // do as if this item were clicked, return true if the resulting event was
 | 
			
		||||
    // processed, false otherwise
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ClickItem(wxMenuItem *item);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the key event, return TRUE if done
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the key event, return true if done
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ProcessKeyDown(int key);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_ACCEL
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -167,8 +167,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the next item for the givan accel letter (used by wxFrame), return
 | 
			
		||||
    // -1 if none
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // if unique is not NULL, filled with TRUE if there is only one item with
 | 
			
		||||
    // this accel, FALSE if two or more
 | 
			
		||||
    // if unique is not NULL, filled with true if there is only one item with
 | 
			
		||||
    // this accel, false if two or more
 | 
			
		||||
    int FindNextItemForAccel(int idxStart,
 | 
			
		||||
                             int keycode,
 | 
			
		||||
                             bool *unique = NULL) const;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_ACCEL
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called by wxMenu when it is dismissed
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnDismissMenu(bool dismissMenuBar = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnDismissMenu(bool dismissMenuBar = false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // common part of all ctors
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnKillFocus(wxFocusEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the mouse move event, return TRUE if we did, FALSE to continue
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the mouse move event, return true if we did, false to continue
 | 
			
		||||
    // processing as usual
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // the coordinates are client coordinates of menubar, convert if necessary
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoSelectMenu(size_t pos);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // popup the currently selected menu
 | 
			
		||||
    void PopupCurrentMenu(bool selectFirst = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void PopupCurrentMenu(bool selectFirst = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // hide the currently selected menu
 | 
			
		||||
    void DismissMenu();
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -36,8 +36,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetText(const wxString& text);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetCheckable(bool checkable);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Check(bool check = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Check(bool check = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we add some extra functions which are also available under MSW from
 | 
			
		||||
    // wxOwnerDrawn class - they will be moved to wxMenuItemBase later
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetBitmaps(const wxBitmap& bmpChecked,
 | 
			
		||||
                    const wxBitmap& bmpUnchecked = wxNullBitmap);
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetBitmap(const wxBitmap& bmp) { SetBitmaps(bmp); }
 | 
			
		||||
    const wxBitmap& GetBitmap(bool checked = TRUE) const
 | 
			
		||||
    const wxBitmap& GetBitmap(bool checked = true) const
 | 
			
		||||
      { return checked ? m_bmpChecked : m_bmpUnchecked; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetDisabledBitmap( const wxBitmap& bmpDisabled )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -76,14 +76,14 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord GetPosition() const
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxASSERT_MSG( m_posY != -1, _T("must call SetHeight first!") );
 | 
			
		||||
        wxASSERT_MSG( m_posY != wxDefaultCoord, _T("must call SetHeight first!") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_posY;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord GetHeight() const
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxASSERT_MSG( m_height != -1, _T("must call SetHeight first!") );
 | 
			
		||||
        wxASSERT_MSG( m_height != wxDefaultCoord, _T("must call SetHeight first!") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return m_height;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the positions of the first and last items of the radio group this item
 | 
			
		||||
    // belongs to or -1: start is the radio group start and is valid for all
 | 
			
		||||
    // but first radio group items (m_isRadioGroupStart == FALSE), end is valid
 | 
			
		||||
    // but first radio group items (m_isRadioGroupStart == false), end is valid
 | 
			
		||||
    // only for the first one
 | 
			
		||||
    union
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -87,19 +87,19 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool InsertPage(size_t nPage,
 | 
			
		||||
                            wxNotebookPage *pPage,
 | 
			
		||||
                            const wxString& strText,
 | 
			
		||||
                            bool bSelect = FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
                            bool bSelect = false,
 | 
			
		||||
                            int imageId = -1);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // style tests
 | 
			
		||||
    // -----------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if all tabs have the same width
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if all tabs have the same width
 | 
			
		||||
    bool FixedSizeTabs() const { return HasFlag(wxNB_FIXEDWIDTH); }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return wxTOP/wxBOTTOM/wxRIGHT/wxLEFT
 | 
			
		||||
    wxDirection GetTabOrientation() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the notebook has tabs at the sidesand not at the top (or
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the notebook has tabs at the sidesand not at the top (or
 | 
			
		||||
    // bottom) as usual
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsVertical() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void PositionSpinBtn();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // refresh the given tab only
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshTab(int page, bool forceSelected = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshTab(int page, bool forceSelected = false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // refresh all tabs
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshAllTabs();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -180,7 +180,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord GetTabWidth(int page) const
 | 
			
		||||
        { return FixedSizeTabs() ? m_widthMax : m_widths[page]; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the tab has an associated image
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the tab has an associated image
 | 
			
		||||
    bool HasImage(int page) const
 | 
			
		||||
        { return m_imageList && m_images[page] != -1; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -95,12 +95,12 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxString GetString(int n) const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetString(int n, const wxString& label);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Enable(int n, bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Show(int n, bool show = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Enable(int n, bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Show(int n, bool show = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we also override the wxControl methods to avoid virtual function hiding
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Show(bool show = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Show(bool show = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxString GetLabel() const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetLabel(const wxString& label);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ private:
 | 
			
		||||
    // common part of DrawItems() and DrawCheckItems()
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoDrawItems(const wxListBox *listbox,
 | 
			
		||||
                     size_t itemFirst, size_t itemLast,
 | 
			
		||||
                     bool isCheckLbox = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                     bool isCheckLbox = false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxWindow *m_window;
 | 
			
		||||
    wxRenderer *m_renderer;
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // draws the arrow on the given DC in the given rectangle, uses
 | 
			
		||||
    // wxControlWithArrows::GetArrowState() to get its current state
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrow(Arrow arrow, wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect,
 | 
			
		||||
                   bool scrollbarLike = FALSE) const;
 | 
			
		||||
                   bool scrollbarLike = false) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // process a mouse move, enter or leave event, possibly calling
 | 
			
		||||
    // wxControlWithArrows::SetArrowState() if wxControlWithArrows::HitTest()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -100,13 +100,13 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // set or clear the specified flag in the arrow state: this function is
 | 
			
		||||
    // responsible for refreshing the control
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetArrowFlag(wxScrollArrows::Arrow arrow,
 | 
			
		||||
                              int flag, bool set = TRUE) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                              int flag, bool set = true) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // hit testing: return on which arrow the point is (or Arrow_None)
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxScrollArrows::Arrow HitTest(const wxPoint& pt) const = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called when the arrow is pressed, return TRUE to continue scrolling and
 | 
			
		||||
    // FALSE to stop it
 | 
			
		||||
    // called when the arrow is pressed, return true to continue scrolling and
 | 
			
		||||
    // false to stop it
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool OnArrow(wxScrollArrows::Arrow arrow) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
};
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetThumbPosition(int thumbPos);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetScrollbar(int position, int thumbSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                              int range, int pageSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                              bool refresh = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                              bool refresh = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // wxScrollBar actions
 | 
			
		||||
    void ScrollToStart();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxBorder GetDefaultBorder() const { return wxBORDER_NONE; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // forces update of thumb's visual appearence (does nothing if m_dirty=FALSE)
 | 
			
		||||
    // forces update of thumb's visual appearence (does nothing if m_dirty=false)
 | 
			
		||||
    void UpdateThumb();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // SetThumbPosition() helper
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -192,14 +192,14 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // this method is called by wxScrollBarTimer only and may be overridden
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE to continue scrolling, FALSE to stop the timer
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true to continue scrolling, false to stop the timer
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool OnScrollTimer(wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
                               const wxControlAction& action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // the methods which must be overridden in the derived class
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the mouse button can be used to activate scrollbar, FALSE
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the mouse button can be used to activate scrollbar, false
 | 
			
		||||
    // if not (only left mouse button can do it under Windows, any button under
 | 
			
		||||
    // GTK+)
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsAllowedButton(int button) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // responsible for refreshing the control
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetShaftPartState(wxScrollThumb::Shaft shaftPart,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   int flag,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   bool set = TRUE) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                                   bool set = true) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called when the user starts dragging the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnThumbDragStart(int pos) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnPageScrollStart() = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called while the user keeps the mouse pressed above/below the thumb,
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE to continue scrollign and FALSE to stop it (e.g. because the
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true to continue scrollign and false to stop it (e.g. because the
 | 
			
		||||
    // scrollbar has reached the top/bottom)
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool OnPageScroll(int pageInc) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
};
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // to implement in derived classes: perform the scroll action and return
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE to continue scrolling or FALSE to stop
 | 
			
		||||
    // true to continue scrolling or false to stop
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool DoNotify() = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // should we skip the next timer event?
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetShaftPartState(wxScrollThumb::Shaft shaftPart,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   int flag,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   bool set = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                                   bool set = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnThumbDragStart(int pos);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnThumbDrag(int pos);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // normalize the value to fit in the range
 | 
			
		||||
    int NormalizeValue(int value) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // change the value by the given increment, return TRUE if really changed
 | 
			
		||||
    // change the value by the given increment, return true if really changed
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ChangeValueBy(int inc);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // change the value to the given one
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -32,14 +32,14 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxSpinButton : public wxSpinButtonBase,
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSpinButton();
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSpinButton(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                 wxWindowID id = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                 wxWindowID id = wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                 const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
 | 
			
		||||
                 const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                 long style = wxSP_VERTICAL | wxSP_ARROW_KEYS,
 | 
			
		||||
                 const wxString& name = wxSPIN_BUTTON_NAME);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowID id = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowID id = wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                long style = wxSP_VERTICAL | wxSP_ARROW_KEYS,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // normalize the value to fit into min..max range
 | 
			
		||||
    int NormalizeValue(int value) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // change the value by +1/-1 and send the event, return TRUE if value was
 | 
			
		||||
    // change the value by +1/-1 and send the event, return true if value was
 | 
			
		||||
    // changed
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ChangeValue(int inc);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                   const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                   long style = 0)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, -1, label, pos, size, style);
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, wxID_ANY, label, pos, size, style);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxStaticBitmap(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxIcon GetIcon() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
private:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer);
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, -1, label, pos, size);
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, wxID_ANY, label, pos, size);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxStaticBox(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // take account of this
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual wxPoint GetBoxAreaOrigin() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw the control
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the size of the border
 | 
			
		||||
    wxRect GetBorderGeometry() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // returning TRUE from here ensures that we act as a container window for
 | 
			
		||||
    // returning true from here ensures that we act as a container window for
 | 
			
		||||
    // our children
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsStaticBox() const { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsStaticBox() const { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
private:
 | 
			
		||||
    DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxStaticBox)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -26,9 +26,9 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                 wxCoord length,
 | 
			
		||||
                 long style = wxLI_HORIZONTAL)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, -1, pos,
 | 
			
		||||
               style & wxLI_VERTICAL ? wxSize(-1, length)
 | 
			
		||||
                                     : wxSize(length, -1),
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, wxID_ANY, pos,
 | 
			
		||||
               style & wxLI_VERTICAL ? wxSize(wxDefaultCoord, length)
 | 
			
		||||
                                     : wxSize(length, wxDefaultCoord),
 | 
			
		||||
               style);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                 const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
 | 
			
		||||
                 const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, -1, label, pos, size, 0, wxStaticTextNameStr);
 | 
			
		||||
        Create(parent, wxID_ANY, label, pos, size, 0, wxStaticTextNameStr);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // full form
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetLabel(const wxString& label);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsFocused() const { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsFocused() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // calculate the optimal size for the label
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxStatusBarUniv() { Init(); }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxStatusBarUniv(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                    wxWindowID id = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                    wxWindowID id = wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                    long style = 0,
 | 
			
		||||
                    const wxString& name = wxPanelNameStr)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowID id = -1,
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowID id = wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                long style = 0,
 | 
			
		||||
                const wxString& name = wxPanelNameStr);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // -----------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // caret stuff
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void ShowCaret(bool show = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void HideCaret() { ShowCaret(FALSE); }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void ShowCaret(bool show = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    void HideCaret() { ShowCaret(false); }
 | 
			
		||||
    void CreateCaret(); // for the current font size
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // helpers for cursor movement
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // override these methods to handle the caret
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetFont(const wxFont &font);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // more readable flag testing methods
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsPassword() const { return (GetWindowStyle() & wxTE_PASSWORD) != 0; }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -295,7 +295,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxRect GetRealTextArea() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // refresh the text in the given (in logical coords) rect
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshTextRect(const wxRect& rect, bool textOnly = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshTextRect(const wxRect& rect, bool textOnly = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // refresh the line wrap marks for the given range of lines (inclusive)
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshLineWrapMarks(wxTextCoord rowFirst, wxTextCoord rowLast);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
                                wxCoord *widthReal = NULL) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the start and end of the selection for this line: if the line is
 | 
			
		||||
    // outside the selection, both will be -1 and FALSE will be returned
 | 
			
		||||
    // outside the selection, both will be -1 and false will be returned
 | 
			
		||||
    bool GetSelectedPartOfLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
                               wxTextPos *start, wxTextPos *end) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -377,7 +377,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
                                     wxTextCoord *colStart,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     wxTextCoord *colEnd,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     wxTextCoord *colRowStart,
 | 
			
		||||
                                     bool devCoords = TRUE) const;
 | 
			
		||||
                                     bool devCoords = true) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // HitTest() version which takes the logical text coordinates and not the
 | 
			
		||||
    // device ones
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
                                           wxTextCoord *row) const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the line and the row in this line corresponding to the given row,
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if ok and FALSE if row is out of range
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if ok and false if row is out of range
 | 
			
		||||
    //
 | 
			
		||||
    // NB: this function can only be called for controls which wrap lines
 | 
			
		||||
    bool GetLineAndRow(wxTextCoord row,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ private:
 | 
			
		||||
    inline const wxArrayString& GetLines() const;
 | 
			
		||||
    inline size_t GetLineCount() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // replace a line (returns TRUE if the number of rows in thel ine changed)
 | 
			
		||||
    // replace a line (returns true if the number of rows in thel ine changed)
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ReplaceLine(wxTextCoord line, const wxString& text);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // remove a line
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ struct WXDLLEXPORT wxThemeInfo
 | 
			
		||||
    WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(extern bool) wxThemeUse##themename;                    \
 | 
			
		||||
    static struct wxThemeUserFor##themename                                 \
 | 
			
		||||
    {                                                                       \
 | 
			
		||||
        wxThemeUserFor##themename() { wxThemeUse##themename = TRUE; }       \
 | 
			
		||||
        wxThemeUserFor##themename() { wxThemeUse##themename = true; }       \
 | 
			
		||||
    } wxThemeDoUse##themename
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// to declare a new theme, this macro must be used in the class declaration
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ struct WXDLLEXPORT wxThemeInfo
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// and this one must be inserted in the source file
 | 
			
		||||
#define WX_IMPLEMENT_THEME(classname, themename, themedesc)                 \
 | 
			
		||||
    WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(bool) wxThemeUse##themename = TRUE;                    \
 | 
			
		||||
    WXDLLEXPORT_DATA(bool) wxThemeUse##themename = true;                    \
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTheme *wxCtorFor##themename() { return new classname; }               \
 | 
			
		||||
    wxThemeInfo classname::ms_info##themename(wxCtorFor##themename,         \
 | 
			
		||||
                                              wxT( #themename ), themedesc)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void RefreshTool(wxToolBarToolBase *tool);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // (re)calculate the tool positions, should only be called if it is
 | 
			
		||||
    // necessary to do it, i.e. m_needsLayout == TRUE
 | 
			
		||||
    // necessary to do it, i.e. m_needsLayout == true
 | 
			
		||||
    void DoLayout();
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the rect limits depending on the orientation: top/bottom for a
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetMinWidth() const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetMinHeight() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool ProvidesBackground() const { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool ProvidesBackground() const { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    // handle titlebar button click event
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -161,9 +161,9 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnNcPaint(wxNcPaintEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnSystemMenu(wxCommandEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE if wxTLW should render decorations (aka titlebar) itself
 | 
			
		||||
    // true if wxTLW should render decorations (aka titlebar) itself
 | 
			
		||||
    static int ms_drawDecorations;
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE if wxTLW can be iconized
 | 
			
		||||
    // true if wxTLW can be iconized
 | 
			
		||||
    static int ms_canIconize;
 | 
			
		||||
    // true for currently active frame
 | 
			
		||||
    bool m_isActive:1;
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -91,8 +91,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
                              int pos,
 | 
			
		||||
                              int page,
 | 
			
		||||
                              int range,
 | 
			
		||||
                              bool refresh = TRUE );
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetScrollPos(int orient, int pos, bool refresh = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                              bool refresh = true );
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void SetScrollPos(int orient, int pos, bool refresh = true);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetScrollPos(int orient) const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetScrollThumb(int orient) const;
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual int GetScrollRange(int orient) const;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -126,8 +126,8 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // return all state flags at once (combination of wxCONTROL_XXX values)
 | 
			
		||||
    int GetStateFlags() const;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // set the "highlighted" flag and return TRUE if it changed
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetCurrent(bool doit = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    // set the "highlighted" flag and return true if it changed
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool SetCurrent(bool doit = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the scrollbar (may be NULL) for the given orientation
 | 
			
		||||
    wxScrollBar *GetScrollbar(int orient) const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -138,33 +138,33 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // methods used by wxColourScheme to choose the colours for this window
 | 
			
		||||
    // --------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if this is a panel/canvas window which contains other
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if this is a panel/canvas window which contains other
 | 
			
		||||
    // controls only
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsCanvasWindow() const { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsCanvasWindow() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // returns TRUE if the control has "transparent" areas such
 | 
			
		||||
    // returns true if the control has "transparent" areas such
 | 
			
		||||
    // as a wxStaticText and wxCheckBox and the background should
 | 
			
		||||
    // be adapted from a parent window
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool HasTransparentBackground() { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    // to be used with function above: transparent windows get
 | 
			
		||||
    // their background from parents that return TRUE here,
 | 
			
		||||
    // their background from parents that return true here,
 | 
			
		||||
    // so this is mostly for wxPanel, wxTopLevelWindow etc.
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool ProvidesBackground() const { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool ProvidesBackground() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if this control can be highlighted when the mouse is over
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if this control can be highlighted when the mouse is over
 | 
			
		||||
    // it (the theme decides itself whether it is really highlighted or not)
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool CanBeHighlighted() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if we should use the colours/fonts returned by the
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if we should use the colours/fonts returned by the
 | 
			
		||||
    // corresponding GetXXX() methods instead of the default ones
 | 
			
		||||
    bool UseBgCol() const { return m_hasBgCol; }
 | 
			
		||||
    bool UseFgCol() const { return m_hasFgCol; }
 | 
			
		||||
    bool UseFont() const { return m_hasFont; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if this window serves as a container for the other windows
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if this window serves as a container for the other windows
 | 
			
		||||
    // only and doesn't get any input itself
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsStaticBox() const { return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsStaticBox() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // returns the (low level) renderer to use for drawing the control by
 | 
			
		||||
    // querying the current theme
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -187,11 +187,11 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the rect coordinates are, for us, in client coords, but if no rect is
 | 
			
		||||
    // specified, the entire window is refreshed
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Refresh(bool eraseBackground = TRUE,
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Refresh(bool eraseBackground = true,
 | 
			
		||||
                         const wxRect *rect = (const wxRect *) NULL);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we refresh the window when it is dis/enabled
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Enable(bool enable = true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // should we use the standard control colours or not?
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool ShouldInheritColours() const { return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnKeyUp(wxKeyEvent& event);
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_MENUS
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw the control background, return TRUE if done
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw the control background, return true if done
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool DoDrawBackground(wxDC& dc);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw the controls border
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ bool wxBitmapButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    // typically too big for them
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxButton::Create(parent, id, bitmap, _T(""),
 | 
			
		||||
                           pos, size, style | wxBU_EXACTFIT, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_bmpNormal = bitmap;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxBitmapButton::OnSetBitmap()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -103,21 +103,21 @@ bool wxBitmapButton::ChangeBitmap(const wxBitmap& bmp)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_bitmap = bitmap;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxBitmapButton::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxButton::Enable(enable) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !enable && ChangeBitmap(m_bmpDisabled) )
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxBitmapButton::SetCurrent(bool doit)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxButton, wxControl)
 | 
			
		||||
void wxButton::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPressed =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isDefault = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isDefault = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ bool wxButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetLabel(label);
 | 
			
		||||
    SetImageLabel(bitmap);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ bool wxButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_BUTTON);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxButton::~wxButton()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ bool wxButton::DoDrawBackground(wxDC& dc)
 | 
			
		||||
                                      rect, GetStateFlags());
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ void wxButton::Press()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_isPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ void wxButton::Release()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_isPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ bool wxButton::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ void wxButton::SetImageMargins(wxCoord x, wxCoord y)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxButton::SetDefault()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isDefault = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isDefault = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ============================================================================
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ wxStdButtonInputHandler::wxStdButtonInputHandler(wxInputHandler *handler)
 | 
			
		||||
                       : wxStdInputHandler(handler)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winCapture = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winHasMouse = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winHasMouse = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_BUTTON_TOGGLE);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleKey(consumer, event, pressed);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -327,11 +327,11 @@ bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winCapture = consumer->GetInputWindow();
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winCapture->CaptureMouse();
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_BUTTON_PRESS);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else if ( event.LeftUp() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                // this will generate a click event
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_BUTTON_TOGGLE);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            //else: the mouse was released outside the window, this doesn't
 | 
			
		||||
            //      count as a click
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -368,27 +368,27 @@ bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( event.Leaving() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // remember that the mouse is now outside
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // we do have a pressed button, so release it
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(false);
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_BUTTON_RELEASE);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        // and entering it back should make it pressed again if it had been
 | 
			
		||||
        // pressed
 | 
			
		||||
        else if ( event.Entering() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // the mouse is (back) inside the button
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHasMouse = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // we did have a pressed button which we released when leaving the
 | 
			
		||||
            // window, press it again
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(true);
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_BUTTON_PRESS);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -398,16 +398,16 @@ bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer * WXUNUSED(consumer),
 | 
			
		||||
                                          const wxFocusEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // buttons change appearance when they get/lose focus, so return TRUE to
 | 
			
		||||
    // buttons change appearance when they get/lose focus, so return true to
 | 
			
		||||
    // refresh
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdButtonInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                                               bool WXUNUSED(activated))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // the default button changes appearance when the app is [de]activated, so
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE to refresh
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true to refresh
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStaticCast(consumer->GetInputWindow(), wxButton)->IsDefault();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxCheckBox, wxControl)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxCheckBox::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPressed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPressed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_status = Status_Unchecked;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -68,14 +68,14 @@ bool wxCheckBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                        const wxString &name)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetLabel(label);
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_CHECKBOX);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ void wxCheckBox::Press()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_isPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ void wxCheckBox::Release()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_isPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isPressed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ void wxCheckBox::Release()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxCheckBox::Toggle()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPressed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPressed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    ChangeValue(!GetValue());
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -258,15 +258,15 @@ bool wxCheckBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_BUTTON_RELEASE )
 | 
			
		||||
        Release();
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( action == wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CHECK )
 | 
			
		||||
        ChangeValue(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        ChangeValue(true);
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_CHECKBOX_CLEAR )
 | 
			
		||||
        ChangeValue(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        ChangeValue(false);
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_CHECKBOX_TOGGLE )
 | 
			
		||||
        Toggle();
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ bool wxCheckListBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxListBox::Create(parent, id, pos, size,
 | 
			
		||||
                            n, choices, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_CHECKLISTBOX);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ bool wxCheckListBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxCheckListBox::IsChecked(size_t item) const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( item < m_checks.GetCount(), FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( item < m_checks.GetCount(), false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("invalid index in wxCheckListBox::IsChecked") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return m_checks[item] != 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ int wxCheckListBox::DoAppend(const wxString& item)
 | 
			
		||||
    int pos = wxListBox::DoAppend(item);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the item is initially unchecked
 | 
			
		||||
    m_checks.Insert(FALSE, pos);
 | 
			
		||||
    m_checks.Insert(false, pos);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return pos;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ void wxCheckListBox::DoInsertItems(const wxArrayString& items, int pos)
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t count = items.GetCount();
 | 
			
		||||
    for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_checks.Insert(FALSE, pos + n);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_checks.Insert(false, pos + n);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ void wxCheckListBox::DoSetItems(const wxArrayString& items, void **clientData)
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t count = items.GetCount();
 | 
			
		||||
    for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_checks.Add(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_checks.Add(false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ bool wxCheckListBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxListBox::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ bool wxStdCheckListboxInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            lbox->PerformAction(wxACTION_CHECKLISTBOX_TOGGLE, item);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
 | 
			
		||||
IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxChoice, wxControl)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxChoice, wxComboBox)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_COMBOBOX(-1, wxChoice::OnComboBox)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_COMBOBOX(wxID_ANY, wxChoice::OnComboBox)
 | 
			
		||||
END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxChoice::wxChoice(wxWindow *parent, wxWindowID id,
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ class wxComboButton : public wxBitmapButton
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxComboButton(wxComboControl *combo)
 | 
			
		||||
        : wxBitmapButton(combo->GetParent(), -1, wxNullBitmap,
 | 
			
		||||
        : wxBitmapButton(combo->GetParent(), wxID_ANY, wxNullBitmap,
 | 
			
		||||
                         wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                         wxBORDER_NONE | wxBU_EXACTFIT)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -182,12 +182,12 @@ private:
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxComboButton, wxButton)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_BUTTON(-1, wxComboButton::OnButton)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_BUTTON(wxID_ANY, wxComboButton::OnButton)
 | 
			
		||||
END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxComboListBox, wxListBox)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_LISTBOX(-1, wxComboListBox::OnSelect)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_LISTBOX_DCLICK(-1, wxComboListBox::OnSelect)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_LISTBOX(wxID_ANY, wxComboListBox::OnSelect)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_LISTBOX_DCLICK(wxID_ANY, wxComboListBox::OnSelect)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_MOTION(wxComboListBox::OnMouseMove)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_LEFT_UP(wxComboListBox::OnLeftUp)
 | 
			
		||||
END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxComboTextCtrl, wxTextCtrl)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_KEY_DOWN(wxComboTextCtrl::OnKey)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_KEY_UP(wxComboTextCtrl::OnKey)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_TEXT(-1, wxComboTextCtrl::OnText)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_TEXT(wxID_ANY, wxComboTextCtrl::OnText)
 | 
			
		||||
END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxComboBox, wxControl)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ void wxComboControl::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_popup = (wxComboPopup *)NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winPopup = (wxPopupComboWindow *)NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_btn = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_text = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ bool wxComboControl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    style &= ~wxBORDER_NONE;
 | 
			
		||||
    style |= wxBORDER_SUNKEN;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // create the text control and the button as our siblings (*not* children),
 | 
			
		||||
    // don't care about size/position here - they will be set in DoMoveWindow()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -248,10 +248,10 @@ bool wxComboControl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // for compatibility with the other ports, the height specified is the
 | 
			
		||||
    // combined height of the combobox itself and the popup
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( size.y == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( size.y == wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // ok, use default height for popup too
 | 
			
		||||
        m_heightPopup = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_heightPopup = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -267,13 +267,13 @@ bool wxComboControl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // have to disable this window to avoid interfering it with message
 | 
			
		||||
    // processing to the text and the button... but pretend it is enabled to
 | 
			
		||||
    // make IsEnabled() return TRUE
 | 
			
		||||
    wxControl::Enable(FALSE); // don't use non virtual Disable() here!
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isEnabled = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    // make IsEnabled() return true
 | 
			
		||||
    wxControl::Enable(false); // don't use non virtual Disable() here!
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isEnabled = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_COMBOBOX);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxComboControl::~wxComboControl()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -340,18 +340,18 @@ void wxComboControl::DoMoveWindow(int x, int y, int width, int height)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxComboControl::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Enable(enable) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_btn->Enable(enable);
 | 
			
		||||
    m_text->Enable(enable);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxComboControl::Show(bool show)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Show(show) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if (m_btn)
 | 
			
		||||
        m_btn->Show(show);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ bool wxComboControl::Show(bool show)
 | 
			
		||||
    if (m_text)
 | 
			
		||||
        m_text->Show(show);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TOOLTIPS
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ void wxComboControl::ShowPopup()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // size and position the popup window correctly
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winPopup->SetSize(GetSize().x,
 | 
			
		||||
                        m_heightPopup == -1 ? control->GetBestSize().y
 | 
			
		||||
                        m_heightPopup == wxDefaultCoord ? control->GetBestSize().y
 | 
			
		||||
                                            : m_heightPopup);
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSize sizePopup = m_winPopup->GetClientSize();
 | 
			
		||||
    control->SetSize(0, 0, sizePopup.x, sizePopup.y);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ void wxComboControl::ShowPopup()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_text->SelectAll();
 | 
			
		||||
    m_popup->SetSelection(m_text->GetValue());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxComboControl::HidePopup()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ void wxComboControl::HidePopup()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winPopup->Dismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isPopupShown = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxComboControl::OnSelect(const wxString& value)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -459,7 +459,7 @@ wxComboTextCtrl::wxComboTextCtrl(wxComboControl *combo,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 const wxString& value,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 long style,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 const wxValidator& validator)
 | 
			
		||||
               : wxTextCtrl(combo->GetParent(), -1, value,
 | 
			
		||||
               : wxTextCtrl(combo->GetParent(), wxID_ANY, value,
 | 
			
		||||
                            wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                            wxBORDER_NONE | style,
 | 
			
		||||
                            validator)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ void wxComboTextCtrl::OnKey(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxComboListBox::wxComboListBox(wxComboControl *combo, int style)
 | 
			
		||||
              : wxListBox(combo->GetPopupWindow(), -1,
 | 
			
		||||
              : wxListBox(combo->GetPopupWindow(), wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                          wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                          0, NULL,
 | 
			
		||||
                          wxBORDER_SIMPLE | wxLB_INT_HEIGHT | style),
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -551,10 +551,10 @@ bool wxComboListBox::SetSelection(const wxString& value)
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( !FindItem(value) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no match att all
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxComboListBox::OnSelect(wxCommandEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ void wxComboListBox::OnSelect(wxCommandEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
void wxComboListBox::OnShow()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // nobody clicked us yet
 | 
			
		||||
    m_clicked = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_clicked = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxComboListBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ bool wxComboListBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        // we don't let the listbox handle this as instead of just using the
 | 
			
		||||
        // single key presses, as usual, we use the text ctrl value as prefix
 | 
			
		||||
        // and this is done by wxComboControl itself
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxListBox::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ bool wxComboListBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
void wxComboListBox::OnLeftUp(wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // we should dismiss the combo now
 | 
			
		||||
    m_clicked = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_clicked = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    event.Skip();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -702,7 +702,7 @@ bool wxComboBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxComboControl::Create(parent, id, value, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxComboListBox *combolbox =
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -712,7 +712,7 @@ bool wxComboBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetPopupControl(combolbox);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxComboBox::~wxComboBox()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -911,14 +911,14 @@ bool wxComboControl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   long numArg,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   const wxString& strArg)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    bool processed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool processed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( action == wxACTION_COMBOBOX_POPUP )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !m_isPopupShown )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            ShowPopup();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_COMBOBOX_DISMISS )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -927,7 +927,7 @@ bool wxComboControl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            HidePopup();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ bool wxComboControl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -967,11 +967,11 @@ bool wxStdComboBoxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -73,10 +73,10 @@ bool wxControl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControlBase::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // underlying window creation failed?
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ void wxControlRenderer::DrawBitmap(wxDC &dc,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // do draw it
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxControlRenderer::DrawScrollbar(const wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ void wxControlRenderer::DrawScrollbar(const wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
                   rectUpdate.GetBottom());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if 0 //def WXDEBUG_SCROLLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
        static bool s_refreshDebug = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        static bool s_refreshDebug = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( s_refreshDebug )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            wxClientDC dc(wxConstCast(scrollbar, wxScrollBar));
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -628,7 +628,7 @@ void wxControlRenderer::DrawScrollbar(const wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
                (wxScrollArrows::Arrow)nArrow,
 | 
			
		||||
                m_dc,
 | 
			
		||||
                rectArrow,
 | 
			
		||||
                TRUE // draw a scrollbar arrow, not just an arrow
 | 
			
		||||
                true // draw a scrollbar arrow, not just an arrow
 | 
			
		||||
            );
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ void wxControlRenderer::DoDrawItems(const wxListBox *lbox,
 | 
			
		||||
void wxControlRenderer::DrawCheckItems(const wxCheckListBox *lbox,
 | 
			
		||||
                                       size_t itemFirst, size_t itemLast)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    DoDrawItems(lbox, itemFirst, itemLast, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    DoDrawItems(lbox, itemFirst, itemLast, true);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_CHECKLISTBOX
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ void wxDialog::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_returnCode = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_windowDisabler = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_eventLoop = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxDialog::~wxDialog()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ void wxDialog::OnCancel(wxCommandEvent &WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        SetReturnCode(wxID_CANCEL);
 | 
			
		||||
        Show(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        Show(false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ void wxDialog::OnOK(wxCommandEvent &WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            SetReturnCode(wxID_OK);
 | 
			
		||||
            Show(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            Show(false);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -185,9 +185,9 @@ int wxDialog::ShowModal()
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Show(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    Show(true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxASSERT_MSG( !m_windowDisabler, _T("disabling windows twice?") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -217,9 +217,9 @@ void wxDialog::EndModal(int retCode)
 | 
			
		||||
        return;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isShowingModal = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    m_eventLoop->Exit();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Show(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    Show(false);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ void wxFrame::PositionStatusBar()
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_frameStatusBar )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxSize size = GetClientSize();
 | 
			
		||||
        m_frameStatusBar->SetSize(0, size.y, size.x, -1);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_frameStatusBar->SetSize(0, size.y, size.x, wxDefaultCoord);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -319,10 +319,10 @@ int wxFrame::GetMinHeight() const
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxFrame::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if (!wxFrameBase::Enable(enable))
 | 
			
		||||
    	return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
#ifdef __WXMICROWIN__
 | 
			
		||||
    if (m_frameMenuBar)
 | 
			
		||||
        m_frameMenuBar->Enable(enable);
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -65,12 +65,12 @@ bool wxGauge::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxGaugeBase::Create(parent, id, range, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                              validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -104,12 +104,12 @@ wxSize wxGauge::DoGetBestClientSize() const
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsVertical() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        size.x = (3*size.y) / 2 + 2;
 | 
			
		||||
        size.y = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        size.y = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        size.y = (3*size.x) / 2 + 2;
 | 
			
		||||
        size.x = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        size.x = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return size;
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -66,13 +66,13 @@ void wxInputConsumer::CreateInputHandler(const wxString& inphandler)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxInputConsumer::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_inputHandler || !m_inputHandler->HandleKey(this, event, TRUE) )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_inputHandler || !m_inputHandler->HandleKey(this, event, true) )
 | 
			
		||||
        event.Skip();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxInputConsumer::OnKeyUp(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_inputHandler || !m_inputHandler->HandleKey(this, event, FALSE) )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_inputHandler || !m_inputHandler->HandleKey(this, event, false) )
 | 
			
		||||
        event.Skip();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -103,6 +103,6 @@ bool wxInputConsumer::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& WXUNUSED(action),
 | 
			
		||||
                                    long WXUNUSED(numArg),
 | 
			
		||||
                                    const wxString& WXUNUSED(strArg))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -44,19 +44,19 @@
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer * WXUNUSED(consumer),
 | 
			
		||||
                                     const wxMouseEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *WXUNUSED(consumer),
 | 
			
		||||
                                 const wxFocusEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *WXUNUSED(consumer),
 | 
			
		||||
                                      bool WXUNUSED(activated))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxInputHandler::~wxInputHandler()
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ void wxListBox::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
    // no items hence no current item
 | 
			
		||||
    m_current = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_selAnchor = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_currentChanged = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_currentChanged = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // no need to update anything initially
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateCount = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ void wxListBox::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_showScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_showScrollbarY = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_showScrollbarY = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxListBox::wxListBox(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ bool wxListBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, 
 | 
			
		||||
                            validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetWindow(this);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ bool wxListBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_LISTBOX);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxListBox::~wxListBox()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ int wxListBox::DoAppend(const wxString& item)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_itemsClientData.Insert(NULL, index);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( HasHorzScrollbar() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ int wxListBox::DoAppend(const wxString& item)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            m_maxWidth = width;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_maxWidthItem = index;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_updateScrollbarX = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_updateScrollbarX = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ void wxListBox::DoInsertItems(const wxArrayString& items, int pos)
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the number of items has changed so we might have to show the scrollbar
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the max width also might have changed - just recalculate it instead of
 | 
			
		||||
    // keeping track of it here, this is probably more efficient for a typical
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ void wxListBox::DoSetItems(const wxArrayString& items, void **clientData)
 | 
			
		||||
        m_itemsClientData.Insert(clientData ? clientData[n] : NULL, index);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    RefreshAll();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ void wxListBox::SetString(int n, const wxString& s)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            m_maxWidth = width;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_maxWidthItem = n;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_updateScrollbarX = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_updateScrollbarX = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        // or also decreased if the old string was the longest one
 | 
			
		||||
        else if ( n == m_maxWidthItem )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ void wxListBox::Clear()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    DoClear();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    RefreshHorzScrollbar();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ void wxListBox::Delete(int n)
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the number of items has changed, hence the scrollbar may disappear
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // finally, if the longest item was deleted the scrollbar may disappear
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( n == m_maxWidthItem )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ void wxListBox::RefreshAll()
 | 
			
		||||
void wxListBox::RefreshHorzScrollbar()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_maxWidth = 0; // recalculate it
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarX = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarX = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxListBox::UpdateScrollbars()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ void wxListBox::UpdateScrollbars()
 | 
			
		||||
    else // never show it
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        charWidth = maxWidth = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
        showScrollbarX = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        showScrollbarX = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // what should be the scrollbar range now?
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ void wxListBox::UpdateItems()
 | 
			
		||||
                   m_updateFrom, m_updateFrom + m_updateCount - 1,
 | 
			
		||||
                   rect.GetTop(), rect.GetBottom());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(TRUE, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(true, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -667,14 +667,14 @@ void wxListBox::OnInternalIdle()
 | 
			
		||||
        UpdateScrollbars();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_currentChanged )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        DoEnsureVisible(m_current);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_currentChanged = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_currentChanged = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_updateCount )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -741,13 +741,13 @@ void wxListBox::DoDrawRange(wxControlRenderer *renderer,
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxListBox::SetFont(const wxFont& font)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::SetFont(font) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CalcItemsPerPage();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    RefreshAll();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxListBox::CalcItemsPerPage()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -804,7 +804,7 @@ void wxListBox::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the scrollbars might [dis]appear
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    event.Skip();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -909,7 +909,7 @@ void wxListBox::SetCurrentItem(int n)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( m_current != -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            m_currentChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_currentChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            RefreshItem(m_current);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ bool wxListBox::FindItem(const wxString& prefix, bool strictlyAfter)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !count )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // empty listbox, we can't find anything in it
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // start either from the current item or from the next one if strictlyAfter
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -964,12 +964,12 @@ bool wxListBox::FindItem(const wxString& prefix, bool strictlyAfter)
 | 
			
		||||
                    AnchorSelection(item);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // nothing found
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxListBox::EnsureVisible(int n)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -979,7 +979,7 @@ void wxListBox::EnsureVisible(int n)
 | 
			
		||||
        UpdateScrollbars();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    DoEnsureVisible(n);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1193,7 +1193,7 @@ bool wxListBox::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ============================================================================
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1207,7 +1207,7 @@ wxStdListboxInputHandler::wxStdListboxInputHandler(wxInputHandler *handler,
 | 
			
		||||
    m_btnCapture = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_toggleOnPressAlways = toggleOnPressAlways;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_actionMouse = wxACTION_NONE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_trackMouseOutside = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_trackMouseOutside = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int wxStdListboxInputHandler::HitTest(const wxListBox *lbox,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ wxStdListboxInputHandler::SetupCapture(wxListBox *lbox,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // by default we always do track it
 | 
			
		||||
    m_trackMouseOutside = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_trackMouseOutside = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return action;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1327,7 +1327,7 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    // we're only interested in the key press events
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( pressed && !event.AltDown() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        bool isMoveCmd = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        bool isMoveCmd = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        int style = consumer->GetInputWindow()->GetWindowStyle();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        wxControlAction action;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1370,13 +1370,13 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( style & wxLB_MULTIPLE )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    action = wxACTION_LISTBOX_TOGGLE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    isMoveCmd = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    isMoveCmd = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            case WXK_RETURN:
 | 
			
		||||
                action = wxACTION_LISTBOX_ACTIVATE;
 | 
			
		||||
                isMoveCmd = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                isMoveCmd = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            default:
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1387,7 +1387,7 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(action, -1, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1412,7 +1412,7 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                //else: nothing to do for multiple selection listboxes
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1454,11 +1454,11 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        action = wxACTION_LISTBOX_ACTIVATE;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        lbox->PerformAction(action, item);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleMouse(consumer, event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1478,7 +1478,7 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            // when we do it ourselves): in this case we only react to
 | 
			
		||||
            // the mouse messages when they happen inside the listbox
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( lbox->HitTest(event.GetPosition()) != wxHT_WINDOW_INSIDE )
 | 
			
		||||
                return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        int item = HitTest(lbox, event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1489,7 +1489,7 @@ bool wxStdListboxInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            // events
 | 
			
		||||
            SetupCapture(lbox, event, item);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            m_trackMouseOutside = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_trackMouseOutside = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( IsValidIndex(lbox, item) )
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
        m_width = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetEnabled(bool enabled = TRUE) { m_isEnabled = enabled; }
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetEnabled(bool enabled = true) { m_isEnabled = enabled; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // accessors
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void OnDismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // called when a submenu is dismissed
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnSubmenuDismiss() { m_hasOpenSubMenu = FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    void OnSubmenuDismiss() { m_hasOpenSubMenu = false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // get the currently selected item (may be NULL)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxMenuItem *GetCurrentItem() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    // preselect the first item
 | 
			
		||||
    void SelectFirst() { SetCurrent(m_menu->GetMenuItems().GetFirst()); }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the key event, return TRUE if done
 | 
			
		||||
    // process the key event, return true if done
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ProcessKeyDown(int key);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // process mouse move event
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void ChangeCurrent(wxMenuItemList::compatibility_iterator node);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // activate item, i.e. call either ClickItem() or OpenSubmenu() depending
 | 
			
		||||
    // on what it is, return TRUE if something was done (i.e. it's not a
 | 
			
		||||
    // on what it is, return true if something was done (i.e. it's not a
 | 
			
		||||
    // separator...)
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ActivateItem(wxMenuItem *item, InputMethod how = WithKeyboard);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            // return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return wxEvtHandler::ProcessEvent(event);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -304,7 +304,7 @@ END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
wxPopupMenuWindow::wxPopupMenuWindow(wxWindow *parent, wxMenu *menu)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_menu = menu;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasOpenSubMenu = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasOpenSubMenu = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    ResetCurrent();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ void wxPopupMenuWindow::OnDismiss()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // when we are dismissed because the user clicked elsewhere or we lost
 | 
			
		||||
    // focus in any other way, hide the parent menu as well
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleDismiss(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleDismiss(true);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxPopupMenuWindow::HandleDismiss(bool dismissParent)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -486,7 +486,7 @@ void wxPopupMenuWindow::HandleDismiss(bool dismissParent)
 | 
			
		||||
void wxPopupMenuWindow::DismissAndNotify()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    Dismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleDismiss(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleDismiss(true);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ void wxPopupMenuWindow::OpenSubmenu(wxMenuItem *item, InputMethod how)
 | 
			
		||||
                   wxSize(m_menu->GetGeometryInfo().GetSize().x, 0),
 | 
			
		||||
                   how == WithKeyboard /* preselect first item then */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasOpenSubMenu = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasOpenSubMenu = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ActivateItem(wxMenuItem *item, InputMethod how)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ActivateItem(wxMenuItem *item, InputMethod how)
 | 
			
		||||
    // don't activate disabled items
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !item || !item->IsEnabled() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // normal menu items generate commands, submenus can be opened and
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -671,10 +671,10 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ActivateItem(wxMenuItem *item, InputMethod how)
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // separator, can't activate
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -696,19 +696,19 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessLeftDown(wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            wxPopupMenuWindow *win = menu->m_popupMenu;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            wxCHECK_MSG( win, FALSE, _T("parent menu not shown?") );
 | 
			
		||||
            wxCHECK_MSG( win, false, _T("parent menu not shown?") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            pos = ClientToScreen(pos);
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( win->GetMenuItemFromPoint(win->ScreenToClient(pos)) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // eat the event
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            //else: it is outside the parent menu as well, do dismiss this one
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxPopupMenuWindow::OnLeftUp(wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ void wxPopupMenuWindow::OnMouseLeave(wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // this menu is the last opened
 | 
			
		||||
            resetCurrent = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            resetCurrent = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( resetCurrent )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -866,14 +866,14 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
    // to open it inspit of this)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( HasOpenSubmenu() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( CanOpen(item), FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( CanOpen(item), false,
 | 
			
		||||
                     _T("has open submenu but another item selected?") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( item->GetSubMenu()->ProcessKeyDown(key) )
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool processed = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool processed = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // handle the up/down arrows, home, end, esc and return here, pass the
 | 
			
		||||
    // left/right arrows to the menu bar except when the right arrow can be
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -885,7 +885,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
            // menubar
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( !m_menu->GetParent() )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                processed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                processed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
        case WXK_ESCAPE:
 | 
			
		||||
            // close just this menu
 | 
			
		||||
            Dismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
            HandleDismiss(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            HandleDismiss(false);
 | 
			
		||||
            break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        case WXK_RETURN:
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -939,7 +939,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
                else
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    processed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    processed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            break;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -952,7 +952,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                processed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                processed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -966,7 +966,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
                wxMenuItemList::compatibility_iterator nodeStart = GetNextNode();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // do we have more than one item with this accel?
 | 
			
		||||
                bool notUnique = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                bool notUnique = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // translate everything to lower case before comparing
 | 
			
		||||
                wxChar chAccel = wxTolower(key);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
                        }
 | 
			
		||||
                        else // we already had found such item
 | 
			
		||||
                        {
 | 
			
		||||
                            notUnique = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                            notUnique = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                            // no need to continue further, we won't find
 | 
			
		||||
                            // anything we don't already know
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1031,12 +1031,12 @@ bool wxPopupMenuWindow::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
                    //else: just select it but don't activate as the user might
 | 
			
		||||
                    //      have wanted to activate another item
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    // skip "processed = FALSE" below
 | 
			
		||||
                    // skip "processed = false" below
 | 
			
		||||
                    break;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            processed = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return processed;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1124,11 +1124,6 @@ void wxMenu::EndRadioGroup()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxMenuItem* wxMenu::DoAppend(wxMenuItem *item)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    #if 0
 | 
			
		||||
    // not used at all
 | 
			
		||||
    bool check = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    #endif
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( item->GetKind() == wxITEM_RADIO )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        int count = GetMenuItemCount();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1141,12 +1136,6 @@ wxMenuItem* wxMenu::DoAppend(wxMenuItem *item)
 | 
			
		||||
            // for now it has just one element
 | 
			
		||||
            item->SetAsRadioGroupStart();
 | 
			
		||||
            item->SetRadioGroupEnd(m_startRadioGroup);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // ensure that we have a checked item in the radio group
 | 
			
		||||
            #if 0
 | 
			
		||||
            // not used at all
 | 
			
		||||
            check = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            #endif
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else // extend the current radio group
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1330,7 +1319,7 @@ void wxMenu::OnDismiss(bool dismissParent)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // dismissParent is recursive
 | 
			
		||||
            m_menuParent->Dismiss();
 | 
			
		||||
            m_menuParent->OnDismiss(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
            m_menuParent->OnDismiss(true);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // no parent menu
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1396,7 +1385,7 @@ void wxMenu::Dismiss()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxMenu::ProcessKeyDown(int key)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( m_popupMenu, FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( m_popupMenu, false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("can't process key events if not shown") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return m_popupMenu->ProcessKeyDown(key);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1447,12 +1436,12 @@ bool wxMenu::ProcessAccelEvent(const wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            // try its elements
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( item->GetSubMenu()->ProcessAccelEvent(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenu::AddAccelFor(wxMenuItem *item)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1494,10 +1483,10 @@ wxMenuItem::wxMenuItem(wxMenu *parentMenu,
 | 
			
		||||
          : wxMenuItemBase(parentMenu, id, text, help, kind, subMenu)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_posY =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_height = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_height = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_radioGroup.start = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isRadioGroupStart = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isRadioGroupStart = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_bmpDisabled = wxNullBitmap;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1630,7 +1619,7 @@ void wxMenuItem::Check(bool check)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( n != pos )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                node->GetData()->m_isChecked = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                node->GetData()->m_isChecked = false;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            node = node->GetNext();
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1646,7 +1635,7 @@ void wxMenuItem::Check(bool check)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenuItem::SetAsRadioGroupStart()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isRadioGroupStart = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isRadioGroupStart = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenuItem::SetRadioGroupStart(int start)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1677,7 +1666,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_menuShown = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenuBar::Attach(wxFrame *frame)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1701,14 +1690,14 @@ void wxMenuBar::Attach(wxFrame *frame)
 | 
			
		||||
    else // not created yet, do it now
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we have no way to return the error from here anyhow :-(
 | 
			
		||||
        (void)Create(frame, -1);
 | 
			
		||||
        (void)Create(frame, wxID_ANY);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        SetCursor(wxCURSOR_ARROW);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        SetFont(wxSystemSettings::GetFont(wxSYS_SYSTEM_FONT));
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // calculate and set our height (it won't be changed any more)
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSize(-1, GetBestSize().y);
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSize(wxDefaultCoord, GetBestSize().y);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // remember the last frame which had us to avoid unnecessarily reparenting
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1743,14 +1732,14 @@ bool wxMenuBar::Append(wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxMenuBar::Insert(size_t pos, wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxMenuBarBase::Insert(pos, menu, title) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxMenuInfo *info = new wxMenuInfo(title);
 | 
			
		||||
    m_menuInfos.Insert(info, pos);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    RefreshAllItemsAfter(pos);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxMenu *wxMenuBar::Replace(size_t pos, wxMenu *menu, const wxString& title)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1814,7 +1803,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::EnableTop(size_t pos, bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxMenuBar::IsEnabledTop(size_t pos) const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( pos < GetCount(), FALSE, _T("invalid index in IsEnabledTop") );
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( pos < GetCount(), false, _T("invalid index in IsEnabledTop") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return m_menuInfos[pos].IsEnabled();
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2025,7 +2014,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::DoSelectMenu(size_t pos)
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( IsShowingMenu() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // restore m_shouldShowMenu flag after DismissMenu() which resets
 | 
			
		||||
            // it to FALSE
 | 
			
		||||
            // it to false
 | 
			
		||||
            bool old = m_shouldShowMenu;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            DismissMenu();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2101,7 +2090,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::OnLeftDown(wxMouseEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            RefreshItem((size_t)m_current);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // show the menu
 | 
			
		||||
            PopupCurrentMenu(FALSE /* don't select first item - as Windows does */);
 | 
			
		||||
            PopupCurrentMenu(false /* don't select first item - as Windows does */);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2128,7 +2117,7 @@ bool wxMenuBar::ProcessMouseEvent(const wxPoint& pt)
 | 
			
		||||
    static wxPoint s_ptLast;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( pt == s_ptLast )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    s_ptLast = pt;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2137,7 +2126,7 @@ bool wxMenuBar::ProcessMouseEvent(const wxPoint& pt)
 | 
			
		||||
    int currentNew = GetMenuFromPoint(pt);
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( (currentNew == -1) || (currentNew == m_current) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // select the new active item
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2148,10 +2137,10 @@ bool wxMenuBar::ProcessMouseEvent(const wxPoint& pt)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_shouldShowMenu && !m_menuShown)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // open the new menu if the old one we closed had been opened
 | 
			
		||||
        PopupCurrentMenu(FALSE /* don't select first item - as Windows does */);
 | 
			
		||||
        PopupCurrentMenu(false /* don't select first item - as Windows does */);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenuBar::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2303,7 +2292,7 @@ int wxMenuBar::FindNextItemForAccel(int idxStart, int key, bool *unique) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // do we have more than one item with this accel?
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( unique )
 | 
			
		||||
        *unique = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        *unique = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // translate everything to lower case before comparing
 | 
			
		||||
    wxChar chAccel = wxTolower(key);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2343,7 +2332,7 @@ int wxMenuBar::FindNextItemForAccel(int idxStart, int key, bool *unique) const
 | 
			
		||||
            else // we already had found such item
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( unique )
 | 
			
		||||
                    *unique = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    *unique = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // no need to continue further, we won't find
 | 
			
		||||
                // anything we don't already know
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2384,13 +2373,13 @@ bool wxMenuBar::ProcessAccelEvent(const wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( node->GetData()->ProcessAccelEvent(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // menu processed it
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // not found
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_ACCEL
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2407,7 +2396,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::PopupCurrentMenu(bool selectFirst)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxASSERT_MSG( !m_menuShown, _T("shouldn't show two menus at once!") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // in any case, we should show it - even if we won't
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsEnabledTop(m_current) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2445,7 +2434,7 @@ void wxMenuBar::DismissMenu()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxMenuBar::OnDismissMenu(bool dismissMenuBar)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_shouldShowMenu = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_menuShown = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( dismissMenuBar )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2485,7 +2474,7 @@ wxEventLoop *wxWindow::ms_evtLoopPopup = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::DoPopupMenu(wxMenu *menu, int x, int y)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( !ms_evtLoopPopup, FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( !ms_evtLoopPopup, false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("can't show more than one popup menu at a time") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#ifdef __WXMSW__
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2535,7 +2524,7 @@ bool wxWindow::DoPopupMenu(wxMenu *menu, int x, int y)
 | 
			
		||||
    ms_evtLoopPopup = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // remove the handler
 | 
			
		||||
    PopEventHandler(TRUE /* delete it */);
 | 
			
		||||
    PopEventHandler(true /* delete it */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    menu->SetInvokingWindow(NULL);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2543,7 +2532,7 @@ bool wxWindow::DoPopupMenu(wxMenu *menu, int x, int y)
 | 
			
		||||
    SetCursor(cursorOld);
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // __WXMSW__
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxWindow::DismissPopupMenu()
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ class wxNotebookSpinBtn : public wxSpinButton
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxNotebookSpinBtn(wxNotebook *nb)
 | 
			
		||||
        : wxSpinButton(nb, -1,
 | 
			
		||||
        : wxSpinButton(nb, wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                       wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                       nb->IsVertical() ? wxSP_VERTICAL : wxSP_HORIZONTAL)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ private:
 | 
			
		||||
};
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxNotebookSpinBtn, wxSpinButton)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_SPIN(-1, wxNotebookSpinBtn::OnSpin)
 | 
			
		||||
    EVT_SPIN(wxID_ANY, wxNotebookSpinBtn::OnSpin)
 | 
			
		||||
END_EVENT_TABLE()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ============================================================================
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                            wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_sizePad = GetRenderer()->GetTabPadding();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_NOTEBOOK);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ wxString wxNotebook::GetPageText(size_t nPage) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxNotebook::SetPageText(size_t nPage, const wxString& strText)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), FALSE, _T("invalid notebook page") );
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), false, _T("invalid notebook page") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( strText != m_titles[nPage] )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::SetPageText(size_t nPage, const wxString& strText)
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int wxNotebook::GetPageImage(size_t nPage) const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ int wxNotebook::GetPageImage(size_t nPage) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxNotebook::SetPageImage(size_t nPage, int nImage)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), FALSE, _T("invalid notebook page") );
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), false, _T("invalid notebook page") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( m_imageList && nImage < m_imageList->GetImageCount(), FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( m_imageList && nImage < m_imageList->GetImageCount(), false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("invalid image index in SetPageImage()") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( nImage != m_images[nPage] )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::SetPageImage(size_t nPage, int nImage)
 | 
			
		||||
            RefreshTab(nPage);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxNotebook::~wxNotebook()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ int wxNotebook::SetSelection(size_t nPage)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( selOld != INVALID_PAGE )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTab(selOld, TRUE /* this tab was selected */);
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTab(selOld, true /* this tab was selected */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_pages[selOld]->Hide();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::InsertPage(size_t nPage,
 | 
			
		||||
                            int imageId)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t nPages = GetPageCount();
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( nPage == nPages || IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( nPage == nPages || IS_VALID_PAGE(nPage), false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("invalid notebook page in InsertPage()") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // modify the data
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -325,7 +325,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::InsertPage(size_t nPage,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( nPages == 0 )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // always select the first tab to have at least some selection
 | 
			
		||||
        bSelect = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        bSelect = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Relayout();
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -344,13 +344,13 @@ bool wxNotebook::InsertPage(size_t nPage,
 | 
			
		||||
        pPage->Hide();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxNotebook::DeleteAllPages()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxNotebookBase::DeleteAllPages() )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // clear the other arrays as well
 | 
			
		||||
    m_titles.Clear();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ bool wxNotebook::DeleteAllPages()
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Relayout();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxNotebookPage *wxNotebook::DoRemovePage(size_t nPage)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -470,7 +470,7 @@ void wxNotebook::DoDrawTab(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect, size_t n)
 | 
			
		||||
        wxMemoryDC dc;
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SelectObject(bmp);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SetBackground(wxBrush(GetBackgroundColour(), wxSOLID));
 | 
			
		||||
        m_imageList->Draw(image, dc, 0, 0, wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_NORMAL, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_imageList->Draw(image, dc, 0, 0, wxIMAGELIST_DRAW_NORMAL, true);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SelectObject(wxNullBitmap);
 | 
			
		||||
#else
 | 
			
		||||
        bmp = *m_imageList->GetBitmap(image);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -833,7 +833,7 @@ void wxNotebook::ResizeTab(int page)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSize sizeTab = CalcTabSize(page);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we only need full relayout if the page size changes
 | 
			
		||||
    bool needsRelayout = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool needsRelayout = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsVertical() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -845,7 +845,7 @@ void wxNotebook::ResizeTab(int page)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( sizeTab.y > m_heightTab )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        needsRelayout = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        needsRelayout = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_heightTab = sizeTab.y;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1071,7 +1071,7 @@ void wxNotebook::UpdateSpinBtn()
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // this case is special, get rid of it immediately: everything is
 | 
			
		||||
        // visible and we don't need any spin buttons
 | 
			
		||||
        allTabsShown = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        allTabsShown = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // have to reset them manually as we don't call CalcLastVisibleTab()
 | 
			
		||||
        m_firstVisible =
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1301,15 +1301,15 @@ bool wxNotebook::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
                               const wxString& strArg)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( action == wxACTION_NOTEBOOK_NEXT )
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSelection(GetNextPage(TRUE));
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSelection(GetNextPage(true));
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_NOTEBOOK_PREV )
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSelection(GetNextPage(FALSE));
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSelection(GetNextPage(false));
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_NOTEBOOK_GOTO )
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSelection((int)numArg);
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1365,7 +1365,7 @@ bool wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            return consumer->PerformAction(action, page);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ bool wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_NOTEBOOK_GOTO, page);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1404,7 +1404,7 @@ wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleFocusChange(consumer);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1413,7 +1413,7 @@ bool wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    // we react to the focus change in the same way as to the [de]activation
 | 
			
		||||
    HandleFocusChange(consumer);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxStdNotebookInputHandler::HandleFocusChange(wxInputConsumer *consumer)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_radio->OnKeyDown((wxKeyEvent &)event) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ bool wxRadioBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxStaticBox::Create(parent, id, title, pos, size, style, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_VALIDATORS
 | 
			
		||||
    SetValidator(val);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ bool wxRadioBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    // radiobox should already have selection so select at least one item
 | 
			
		||||
    SetSelection(0);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxRadioBox::~wxRadioBox()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ wxRadioBox::~wxRadioBox()
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t count = m_buttons.GetCount();
 | 
			
		||||
    for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_buttons[n]->PopEventHandler(TRUE /* delete it */);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_buttons[n]->PopEventHandler(true /* delete it */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        delete m_buttons[n];
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ void wxRadioBox::Append(int count, const wxString *choices)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // make the first button in the box the start of new group by giving it
 | 
			
		||||
        // wxRB_GROUP style
 | 
			
		||||
        wxRadioButton *btn = new wxRadioButton(parent, -1, choices[n],
 | 
			
		||||
        wxRadioButton *btn = new wxRadioButton(parent, wxID_ANY, choices[n],
 | 
			
		||||
                                               wxDefaultPosition,
 | 
			
		||||
                                               wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                                               n == 0 ? wxRB_GROUP : 0);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ void wxRadioBox::SetSelection(int n)
 | 
			
		||||
    btn->SetFocus();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // this will also unselect the previously selected button in our group
 | 
			
		||||
    btn->SetValue(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
    btn->SetValue(true);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int wxRadioBox::GetSelection() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ void wxRadioBox::Show(int n, bool show)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxRadioBox::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxStaticBox::Enable(enable) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // also enable/disable the buttons
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t count = m_buttons.GetCount();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -352,13 +352,13 @@ bool wxRadioBox::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
        Enable(n, enable);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxRadioBox::Show(bool show)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxStaticBox::Show(show) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // also show/hide the buttons
 | 
			
		||||
    size_t count = m_buttons.GetCount();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ bool wxRadioBox::Show(bool show)
 | 
			
		||||
        Show(n, show);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxString wxRadioBox::GetLabel() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ bool wxRadioBox::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        default:
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    int selOld = GetSelection();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ bool wxRadioBox::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
        SendRadioEvent();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_RADIOBOX
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -62,10 +62,10 @@ bool wxRadioButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxCheckBox::Create(parent, id, label, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                             validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ void wxRadioButton::ClearValue()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsChecked() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        SetValue(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        SetValue(false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -181,10 +181,10 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( arrow == m_captureData->m_arrowPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // resume now
 | 
			
		||||
                m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, true);
 | 
			
		||||
                timer->Start();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else // if ( 1 ) FIXME: m_control->ShouldPauseScrolling() )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -194,14 +194,14 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // stop as the mouse left the arrow
 | 
			
		||||
                m_control->SetArrowFlag(m_captureData->m_arrowPressed,
 | 
			
		||||
                                        wxCONTROL_PRESSED, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                                        wxCONTROL_PRESSED, false);
 | 
			
		||||
                timer->Stop();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // reset the wxCONTROL_CURRENT flag for the arrows which don't have the
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
    UpdateCurrentFlag(Arrow_First, arrow);
 | 
			
		||||
    UpdateCurrentFlag(Arrow_Second, arrow);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if it was really an event for an arrow
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if it was really an event for an arrow
 | 
			
		||||
    return !event.Leaving() && arrow != Arrow_None;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( btn == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we only care about button press/release events
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( event.ButtonDown() || event.ButtonDClick() )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -230,13 +230,13 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( arrow == Arrow_None )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // mouse pressed over something else
 | 
			
		||||
                return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return false;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_control->GetArrowState(arrow) & wxCONTROL_DISABLED )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // don't allow to press disabled arrows
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            wxConstCast(this, wxScrollArrows)->m_captureData =
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                m_captureData->m_timerScroll = tmpTimerScroll;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, true);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -274,14 +274,14 @@ bool wxScrollArrows::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        delete m_captureData;
 | 
			
		||||
        wxConstCast(this, wxScrollArrows)->m_captureData = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_control->SetArrowFlag(arrow, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we don't process this
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ void wxScrollBar::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
        m_elementsState[n] = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxScrollBar::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    style &= ~wxBORDER_MASK;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_SCROLLBAR);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxScrollBar::~wxScrollBar()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::IsStandalone() const
 | 
			
		||||
    wxWindow *parent = GetParent();
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !parent )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return (parent->GetScrollbar(wxHORIZONTAL) != this) &&
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -222,7 +222,7 @@ void wxScrollBar::DoSetThumb(int pos)
 | 
			
		||||
    m_elementsState[Element_Thumb] |= wxCONTROL_DIRTY;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_elementsState[m_thumbPos > m_thumbPosOld
 | 
			
		||||
                        ? Element_Bar_1 : Element_Bar_2] |= wxCONTROL_DIRTY;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int wxScrollBar::GetThumbPosition() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ void wxScrollBar::UpdateThumb()
 | 
			
		||||
                    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#ifdef WXDEBUG_SCROLLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
        static bool s_refreshDebug = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        static bool s_refreshDebug = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( s_refreshDebug )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            wxClientDC dc(this);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -392,14 +392,14 @@ void wxScrollBar::UpdateThumb()
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // WXDEBUG_SCROLLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    Refresh(FALSE, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
                    Refresh(false, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                m_elementsState[n] &= ~wxCONTROL_DIRTY;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_dirty = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_dirty = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -408,7 +408,7 @@ void wxScrollBar::DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer)
 | 
			
		||||
    renderer->DrawScrollbar(this, m_thumbPosOld);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // clear all dirty flags
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_dirty = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_thumbPosOld = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ void wxScrollBar::SetState(Element which, int flags)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_elementsState[which] = flags | wxCONTROL_DIRTY;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_dirty = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_dirty = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    int thumbOld = m_thumbPos;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool notify = FALSE; // send an event about the change?
 | 
			
		||||
    bool notify = false; // send an event about the change?
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxEventType scrollType;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -536,7 +536,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_SCROLL_THUMB_RELEASE )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // always notify about this
 | 
			
		||||
        notify = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        notify = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        scrollType = wxEVT_SCROLLWIN_THUMBRELEASE;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -562,7 +562,7 @@ bool wxScrollBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        GetParent()->GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxScrollBar::ScrollToStart()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -578,13 +578,13 @@ void wxScrollBar::ScrollToEnd()
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxScrollBar::ScrollLines(int nLines)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    DoSetThumb(m_thumbPos + nLines);
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxScrollBar::ScrollPages(int nPages)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    DoSetThumb(m_thumbPos + nPages*m_pageSize);
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ============================================================================
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -654,12 +654,12 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::OnScrollTimer(wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
    int oldThumbPos = scrollbar->GetThumbPosition();
 | 
			
		||||
    scrollbar->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( scrollbar->GetThumbPosition() != oldThumbPos )
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we scrolled till the end
 | 
			
		||||
    m_timerScroll->Stop();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::StopScrolling(wxScrollBar *control)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -680,7 +680,7 @@ void wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::StopScrolling(wxScrollBar *control)
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // unpress the arrow and highlight the current element
 | 
			
		||||
    Press(control, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    Press(control, false);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxCoord
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -721,11 +721,11 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            case WXK_NEXT:      action = wxACTION_SCROLL_PAGE_DOWN; break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -758,7 +758,7 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                m_winCapture->CaptureMouse();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // generate the command
 | 
			
		||||
                bool hasAction = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                bool hasAction = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                wxControlAction action;
 | 
			
		||||
                switch ( ht )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -788,18 +788,18 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                        // fall through: there is no immediate action
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    default:
 | 
			
		||||
                        hasAction = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                        hasAction = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // remove highlighting
 | 
			
		||||
                Highlight(scrollbar, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                Highlight(scrollbar, false);
 | 
			
		||||
                m_htLast = ht;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // and press the arrow or highlight thumb now instead
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( m_htLast == wxHT_SCROLLBAR_THUMB )
 | 
			
		||||
                    Highlight(scrollbar, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                    Highlight(scrollbar, true);
 | 
			
		||||
                else
 | 
			
		||||
                    Press(scrollbar, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                    Press(scrollbar, true);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // start dragging
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( hasAction )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                m_htLast = ht;
 | 
			
		||||
                Highlight(scrollbar, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                Highlight(scrollbar, true);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -855,11 +855,11 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            // between the mouse position and the top/left of the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
            HandleThumbMove(scrollbar, event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // no other changes are possible while the mouse is captured
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool isArrow = scrollbar->GetArrows().HandleMouseMove(event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -874,35 +874,35 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( ht == m_htLast )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // nothing changed
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#ifdef DEBUG_MOUSE
 | 
			
		||||
        wxLogDebug("Scrollbar::OnMouseMove: ht = %d", ht);
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // DEBUG_MOUSE
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Highlight(scrollbar, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        Highlight(scrollbar, false);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_htLast = ht;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !isArrow )
 | 
			
		||||
            Highlight(scrollbar, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
            Highlight(scrollbar, true);
 | 
			
		||||
        //else: already done by wxScrollArrows::HandleMouseMove
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( event.Leaving() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !isArrow )
 | 
			
		||||
            Highlight(scrollbar, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            Highlight(scrollbar, false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_htLast = wxHT_NOWHERE;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // event.Entering()
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we don't process this event
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we did something
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_SCROLLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -913,7 +913,7 @@ bool wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxScrollTimer::wxScrollTimer()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_skipNext = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_skipNext = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxScrollTimer::StartAutoScroll()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -928,7 +928,7 @@ void wxScrollTimer::StartAutoScroll()
 | 
			
		||||
    // there is an initial delay before the scrollbar starts scrolling -
 | 
			
		||||
    // implement it by ignoring the first timer expiration and only start
 | 
			
		||||
    // scrolling from the second one
 | 
			
		||||
    m_skipNext = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_skipNext = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    Start(200); // FIXME: hardcoded delay
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -940,7 +940,7 @@ void wxScrollTimer::Notify()
 | 
			
		||||
        Stop();
 | 
			
		||||
        Start(50); // FIXME: hardcoded delay
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_skipNext = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_skipNext = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( btn == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no...
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // when the mouse is pressed on any scrollbar element, we capture it
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( HasCapture() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // mouse already captured, nothing to do
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // determine which part of the window the user clicked in
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( shaftPart == Shaft_None )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // mouse pressed over something else
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // capture the mouse
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -219,15 +219,15 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouse(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        delete m_captureData;
 | 
			
		||||
        wxConstCast(this, wxScrollThumb)->m_captureData = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_control->SetShaftPartState(shaftPart, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_control->SetShaftPartState(shaftPart, wxCONTROL_PRESSED, false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // another mouse button released
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we don't process this
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -242,7 +242,7 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // we process all mouse events while the mouse is captured by us
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // no capture
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ bool wxScrollThumb::HandleMouseMove(const wxMouseEvent& event) const
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( shaftPart != m_shaftPart )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // update the highlighted state
 | 
			
		||||
            m_control->SetShaftPartState(m_shaftPart, wxCONTROL_CURRENT, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            m_control->SetShaftPartState(m_shaftPart, wxCONTROL_CURRENT, false);
 | 
			
		||||
            wxConstCast(this, wxScrollThumb)->m_shaftPart = shaftPart;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_control->SetShaftPartState(m_shaftPart, wxCONTROL_CURRENT, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
            m_control->SetShaftPartState(m_shaftPart, wxCONTROL_CURRENT, true);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // if the event happened on the shaft, it was for us and we processed
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ bool wxSlider::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxSliderBase::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                               validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetRange(minValue, maxValue);
 | 
			
		||||
    SetValue(value);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ bool wxSlider::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_SLIDER);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -184,11 +184,11 @@ bool wxSlider::ChangeValueBy(int inc)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxSlider::ChangeValueTo(int value)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // check if the value is going to change at all
 | 
			
		||||
    if (value == m_value) return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    if (value == m_value) return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // this method is protected and we should only call it with normalized
 | 
			
		||||
    // value!
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IsInRange(value), FALSE, _T("invalid slider value") );
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( IsInRange(value), false, _T("invalid slider value") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_value = value;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ bool wxSlider::ChangeValueTo(int value)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    (void)GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxSlider::SetValue(int value)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ bool wxSlider::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_SLIDER_THUMB_DRAG )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no special processing for it
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_SLIDER_THUMB_MOVE ||
 | 
			
		||||
              action == wxACTION_SLIDER_THUMB_RELEASE )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ bool wxSlider::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -987,11 +987,11 @@ bool wxStdSliderButtonInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ bool wxStdSliderButtonInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( slider->GetThumb().HandleMouse(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // processed by the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleMouse(consumer, event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1020,7 +1020,7 @@ bool wxStdSliderButtonInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( slider->GetThumb().HandleMouseMove(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // processed by the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(consumer, event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ wxStdSliderButtonInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer * WXUNUSED(consumer),
 | 
			
		||||
                                           const wxFocusEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // slider's appearance changes when it gets/loses focus
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_SLIDER
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ bool wxSpinButton::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxSpinButtonBase::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                                   wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_SPINBTN);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ bool wxSpinButton::ChangeValue(int inc)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // nothing changed - most likely because we are already at min/max
 | 
			
		||||
        // value
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSpinEvent event(inc > 0 ? wxEVT_SCROLL_LINEUP : wxEVT_SCROLL_LINEDOWN,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ bool wxSpinButton::ChangeValue(int inc)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event) && !event.IsAllowed() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // programm has vetoed the event
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_value = valueNew;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ bool wxSpinButton::ChangeValue(int inc)
 | 
			
		||||
    event.SetEventType(wxEVT_SCROLL_THUMBTRACK);
 | 
			
		||||
    (void)GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ bool wxSpinButton::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -390,11 +390,11 @@ bool wxStdSpinButtonInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ bool wxStdSpinButtonInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( spinbtn->GetArrows().HandleMouse(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // don't refresh, everything is already done
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleMouse(consumer, event);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ bool wxStdSpinButtonInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( spinbtn->GetArrows().HandleMouseMove(event) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // processed by the arrows
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(consumer, event);
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ bool wxStaticBitmap::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                            const wxString &name)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // set bitmap first
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBitmap(label);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ bool wxStaticBitmap::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    // and adjust our size to fit it after this
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -56,11 +56,11 @@ bool wxStaticBox::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                         const wxString &name)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetLabel(label);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxStaticBox::DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ bool wxStaticLine::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                          const wxString &name)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSize sizeReal = AdjustSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( sizeReal != size )
 | 
			
		||||
        SetSize(sizeReal);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxStaticLine::DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -57,12 +57,12 @@ bool wxStaticText::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                          const wxString &name)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style, wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
    SetLabel(label);
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ bool wxStatusBarUniv::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                           wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                           style, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetFieldsCount(1);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ bool wxStatusBarUniv::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetSize(DoGetBestSize());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -254,7 +254,7 @@ void wxStatusBarUniv::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStatusBarUniv::GetFieldRect(int n, wxRect& rect) const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( n >= 0 && n < m_nFields, FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( n >= 0 && n < m_nFields, false,
 | 
			
		||||
                 _T("invalid field index in GetFieldRect()") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // this is a fix for a bug exhibited by the statbar sample: if
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -265,7 +265,7 @@ bool wxStatusBarUniv::GetFieldRect(int n, wxRect& rect) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    rect = DoGetFieldRect(n);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxRect wxStatusBarUniv::DoGetFieldRect(int n) const
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
   Everywhere in this file LINE refers to a logical line of text, and ROW to a
 | 
			
		||||
   physical line of text on the display. They are the same unless WrapLines()
 | 
			
		||||
   is TRUE in which case a single LINE may correspond to multiple ROWs.
 | 
			
		||||
   is true in which case a single LINE may correspond to multiple ROWs.
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
   A text position is an unsigned int (which for reasons of compatibility is
 | 
			
		||||
   still a long) from 0 to GetLastPosition() inclusive. The positions
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -270,7 +270,7 @@ struct WXDLLEXPORT wxTextMultiLineData
 | 
			
		||||
        m_scrollRangeY = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_updateScrollbarY = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_widthMax = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_lineLongest = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -367,14 +367,14 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // this code is unused any longer
 | 
			
		||||
#if 0
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the column is in the start of the last row (hence the row
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the column is in the start of the last row (hence the row
 | 
			
		||||
    // it is in is not wrapped)
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsLastRow(wxTextCoord colRowStart) const
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return colRowStart == GetRowStart(m_rowsStart.GetCount());
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // return TRUE if the column is the last column of the row starting in
 | 
			
		||||
    // return true if the column is the last column of the row starting in
 | 
			
		||||
    // colRowStart
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsLastColInRow(wxTextCoord colRowStart,
 | 
			
		||||
                        wxTextCoord colRowEnd,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
        // caller got it wrong
 | 
			
		||||
        wxFAIL_MSG( _T("this column is not in the start of the row!") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // 0
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -501,12 +501,12 @@ struct WXDLLEXPORT wxTextWrappedData : public wxTextMultiLineData
 | 
			
		||||
class wxTextCtrlCommand : public wxCommand
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrlCommand(const wxString& name) : wxCommand(TRUE, name) { }
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrlCommand(const wxString& name) : wxCommand(true, name) { }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we don't use these methods as they don't make sense for us as we need a
 | 
			
		||||
    // wxTextCtrl to be applied
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Do() { wxFAIL_MSG(_T("shouldn't be called")); return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Undo() { wxFAIL_MSG(_T("shouldn't be called")); return FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Do() { wxFAIL_MSG(_T("shouldn't be called")); return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Undo() { wxFAIL_MSG(_T("shouldn't be called")); return false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // instead, our command processor uses these methods
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool Do(wxTextCtrl *text) = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ class wxTextCtrlCommandProcessor : public wxCommandProcessor
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrlCommandProcessor(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_compressInserts = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_compressInserts = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_text = text;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -581,7 +581,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual void Store(wxCommand *command);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // stop compressing insert commands when this is called
 | 
			
		||||
    void StopCompressing() { m_compressInserts = FALSE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    void StopCompressing() { m_compressInserts = false; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // accessors
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrl *GetTextCtrl() const { return m_text; }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ private:
 | 
			
		||||
    // the control we're associated with
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrl *m_text;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // if the flag is TRUE we're compressing subsequent insert commands into
 | 
			
		||||
    // if the flag is true we're compressing subsequent insert commands into
 | 
			
		||||
    // one so that the entire typing could be undone in one call to Undo()
 | 
			
		||||
    bool m_compressInserts;
 | 
			
		||||
};
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -628,8 +628,8 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_selStart =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_selEnd = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isEditable = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isEditable = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_posLast =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_curPos =
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -704,7 +704,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                            validator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetCursor(wxCURSOR_IBEAM);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -737,14 +737,14 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // we can't show caret right now as we're not shown yet and so it would
 | 
			
		||||
    // result in garbage on the screen - we'll do it after first OnPaint()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasCaret = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_hasCaret = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_TEXTCTRL);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxSizeEvent sizeEvent(GetSize(), GetId());
 | 
			
		||||
    GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(sizeEvent);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxTextCtrl::~wxTextCtrl()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -877,7 +877,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::ReplaceLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // the number of rows changed
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // no line wrap
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -886,7 +886,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::ReplaceLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the number of rows didn't change
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::RemoveLine(wxTextCoord line)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1003,7 +1003,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
        //     as if it does we need to refresh everything below the changed
 | 
			
		||||
        //     text (it will be shifted...) and we can avoid it if there is no
 | 
			
		||||
        //     row relayout
 | 
			
		||||
        bool rowsNumberChanged = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        bool rowsNumberChanged = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // (1) join lines
 | 
			
		||||
        const wxArrayString& linesOld = GetLines();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1111,7 +1111,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
                // we have the replacement line for this one
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( ReplaceLine(line, lines[nReplaceLine]) )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    rowsNumberChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    rowsNumberChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                UpdateMaxWidth(line);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1120,13 +1120,13 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // (4b) delete all extra lines (note that we need to delete
 | 
			
		||||
                //      them backwards because indices shift while we do it)
 | 
			
		||||
                bool deletedLongestLine = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                bool deletedLongestLine = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                for ( wxTextCoord lineDel = lineEnd; lineDel >= line; lineDel-- )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    if ( lineDel == MData().m_lineLongest )
 | 
			
		||||
                    {
 | 
			
		||||
                        // we will need to recalc the max line width
 | 
			
		||||
                        deletedLongestLine = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                        deletedLongestLine = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    RemoveLine(lineDel);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // even the line number changed
 | 
			
		||||
                rowsNumberChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                rowsNumberChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // update line to exit the loop
 | 
			
		||||
                line = lineEnd + 1;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1149,7 +1149,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( nReplaceLine < nReplaceCount )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // even the line number changed
 | 
			
		||||
            rowsNumberChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            rowsNumberChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            do
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1207,7 +1207,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Replace(wxTextPos from, wxTextPos to, const wxString& text)
 | 
			
		||||
            RefreshLineRange(lineEnd + 1, 0);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // the vert scrollbar might [dis]appear
 | 
			
		||||
            MData().m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            MData().m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // must recalculate it - will do later
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetSelectedPartOfLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !HasSelection() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no selection at all, hence no selection in this line
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCoord lineStart, colStart;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetSelectedPartOfLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( lineStart > line )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // this line is entirely above the selection
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCoord lineEnd, colEnd;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1542,7 +1542,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetSelectedPartOfLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( lineEnd < line )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // this line is entirely below the selection
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( line == lineStart )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1567,7 +1567,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetSelectedPartOfLine(wxTextCoord line,
 | 
			
		||||
            *end = GetLineLength(line);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1587,12 +1587,12 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::IsEditable() const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::MarkDirty()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::DiscardEdits()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isModified = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::SetEditable(bool editable)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1670,7 +1670,7 @@ wxTextPos wxTextCtrl::XYToPosition(wxTextCoord x, wxTextCoord y) const
 | 
			
		||||
    // if they are out of range
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsSingleLine() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return x > GetLastPosition() || y > 0 ? -1 : x;
 | 
			
		||||
        return x > GetLastPosition() || y > 0 ? wxDefaultCoord : x;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // multiline
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1705,14 +1705,14 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( IsSingleLine() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( (size_t)pos > m_value.length() )
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( x )
 | 
			
		||||
            *x = pos;
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( y )
 | 
			
		||||
            *y = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // multiline
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
                              _T("XYToPosition() or PositionToXY() broken") );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // WXDEBUG_TEXT
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else // go further down
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1746,7 +1746,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // beyond the last line
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1820,7 +1820,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToLogicalXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
    else // must really calculate col/line from pos
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !PositionToXY(pos, &col, &line) )
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    int hLine = GetLineHeight();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1849,7 +1849,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToLogicalXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( yOut )
 | 
			
		||||
        *yOut = y;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToDeviceXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1858,13 +1858,13 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PositionToDeviceXY(wxTextPos pos,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord x, y;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !PositionToLogicalXY(pos, &x, &y) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // finally translate the logical text rect coords into physical client
 | 
			
		||||
    // coords
 | 
			
		||||
    CalcScrolledPosition(m_rectText.x + x, m_rectText.y + y, xOut, yOut);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxPoint wxTextCtrl::GetCaretPosition() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2138,13 +2138,13 @@ void wxTextCtrl::Cut()
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrl::DoCut()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !HasSelection() )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Copy();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    RemoveSelection();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::Paste()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2168,12 +2168,12 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::DoPaste()
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            WriteText(text);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_CLIPBOARD
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2213,7 +2213,7 @@ void wxTextCtrlCommandProcessor::Store(wxCommand *command)
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // append the following insert commands to this one
 | 
			
		||||
        m_compressInserts = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_compressInserts = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // let the base class version will do the job normally
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2248,17 +2248,17 @@ bool wxTextCtrlInsertCommand::Do(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
    // and now do insert it
 | 
			
		||||
    text->WriteText(m_text);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrlInsertCommand::Undo(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( CanUndo(), FALSE, _T("impossible to undo insert cmd") );
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCHECK_MSG( CanUndo(), false, _T("impossible to undo insert cmd") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // remove the text from where we inserted it
 | 
			
		||||
    text->Remove(m_from, m_from + m_text.length());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrlRemoveCommand::CanUndo() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrlRemoveCommand::Do(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
    m_textDeleted = text->GetSelectionText();
 | 
			
		||||
    text->RemoveSelection();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrlRemoveCommand::Undo(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2284,7 +2284,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrlRemoveCommand::Undo(wxTextCtrl *text)
 | 
			
		||||
    text->SetInsertionPoint(m_from > posLast ? posLast : m_from);
 | 
			
		||||
    text->WriteText(m_textDeleted);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::Undo()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2481,7 +2481,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // 0
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        MData().m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
        MData().m_updateScrollbarY = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        MData().m_updateScrollbarY = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    event.Skip();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2665,7 +2665,7 @@ size_t wxTextCtrl::GetPartOfWrappedLine(const wxChar* text,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxString s(text);
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCoord col;
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord wReal = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord wReal = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
    switch ( HitTestLine(s, m_rectText.width, &col) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
            /*
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2690,7 +2690,7 @@ size_t wxTextCtrl::GetPartOfWrappedLine(const wxChar* text,
 | 
			
		||||
                    col--;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    // recalc the width
 | 
			
		||||
                    wReal = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
                    wReal = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
                //else: we can just see it
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2709,7 +2709,7 @@ size_t wxTextCtrl::GetPartOfWrappedLine(const wxChar* text,
 | 
			
		||||
                        if ( colWordStart != col )
 | 
			
		||||
                        {
 | 
			
		||||
                            // will have to recalc the real width
 | 
			
		||||
                            wReal = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
                            wReal = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                            col = colWordStart;
 | 
			
		||||
                        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2732,7 +2732,7 @@ size_t wxTextCtrl::GetPartOfWrappedLine(const wxChar* text,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( widthReal )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( wReal == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( wReal == wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // calc it if not done yet
 | 
			
		||||
            wReal = GetTextWidth(s.Truncate(col));
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2975,7 +2975,7 @@ wxTextCtrlHitTestResult wxTextCtrl::HitTestLogical(const wxPoint& pos,
 | 
			
		||||
                                                   wxTextCoord *colOut,
 | 
			
		||||
                                                   wxTextCoord *rowOut) const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return HitTest2(pos.y, pos.x, 0, rowOut, colOut, NULL, NULL, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    return HitTest2(pos.y, pos.x, 0, rowOut, colOut, NULL, NULL, false);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxTextCtrlHitTestResult wxTextCtrl::HitTest2(wxCoord y0,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3179,7 +3179,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetLineAndRow(wxTextCoord row,
 | 
			
		||||
                rowInLine = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( row < 0 )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    int nLines = GetNumberOfLines();
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( WrapLines() )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3202,13 +3202,13 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetLineAndRow(wxTextCoord row,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( line == nLines )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // the row is out of range
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // no line wrapping, everything is easy
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( row >= nLines )
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        line = row;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3218,7 +3218,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::GetLineAndRow(wxTextCoord row,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( rowInLineOut )
 | 
			
		||||
        *rowInLineOut = rowInLine;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3363,7 +3363,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::ScrollText(wxTextCoord col)
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( dx > 0 )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // refresh the uncovered part on the left
 | 
			
		||||
            Refresh(TRUE, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
            Refresh(true, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // and now the area on the right
 | 
			
		||||
            rect.x = m_rectText.x + posLastVisible;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3376,7 +3376,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::ScrollText(wxTextCoord col)
 | 
			
		||||
            rect.width += m_rectText.width - posLastVisible;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(TRUE, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(true, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // I don't know exactly why is this needed here but without it we may
 | 
			
		||||
        // scroll the window again (from the same method) before the previously
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3544,7 +3544,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::UpdateScrollbars()
 | 
			
		||||
        // just to suppress compiler warnings about using uninit vars below
 | 
			
		||||
        charWidth = maxWidth = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        showScrollbarX = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        showScrollbarX = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // calc the scrollbars ranges
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3581,7 +3581,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::UpdateScrollbars()
 | 
			
		||||
        SetScrollbars(charWidth, lineHeight,
 | 
			
		||||
                      scrollRangeX, scrollRangeY,
 | 
			
		||||
                      x, y,
 | 
			
		||||
                      TRUE /* no refresh */);
 | 
			
		||||
                      true /* no refresh */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( scrollRangeXOld )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3598,7 +3598,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::UpdateScrollbars()
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    MData().m_updateScrollbarX =
 | 
			
		||||
    MData().m_updateScrollbarY = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    MData().m_updateScrollbarY = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::OnInternalIdle()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3837,7 +3837,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::RefreshTextRect(const wxRect& rectClient, bool textOnly)
 | 
			
		||||
    rect.Offset(m_rectText.GetPosition());
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // don't refresh beyond the text area unless we're refreshing the line wrap
 | 
			
		||||
    // marks in which case textOnly is FALSE
 | 
			
		||||
    // marks in which case textOnly is false
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( textOnly )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( rect.GetRight() > m_rectText.GetRight() )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3874,7 +3874,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::RefreshTextRect(const wxRect& rectClient, bool textOnly)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxLogTrace(_T("text"), _T("Refreshing (%d, %d)-(%d, %d)"),
 | 
			
		||||
               rect.x, rect.y, rect.x + rect.width, rect.y + rect.height);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Refresh(TRUE, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
    Refresh(true, &rect);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::RefreshLineWrapMarks(wxTextCoord rowFirst,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3888,7 +3888,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::RefreshLineWrapMarks(wxTextCoord rowFirst,
 | 
			
		||||
        rectMarks.y = rowFirst*GetLineHeight();
 | 
			
		||||
        rectMarks.height = (rowLast - rowFirst)*GetLineHeight();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTextRect(rectMarks, FALSE /* don't limit to text area */);
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTextRect(rectMarks, false /* don't limit to text area */);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4215,7 +4215,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        ShowCaret();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        m_hasCaret = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_hasCaret = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4226,7 +4226,7 @@ void wxTextCtrl::DoDraw(wxControlRenderer *renderer)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrl::SetFont(const wxFont& font)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxControl::SetFont(font) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // and refresh everything, of course
 | 
			
		||||
    InitInsertionPoint();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4246,20 +4246,20 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::SetFont(const wxFont& font)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTextCtrl::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxTextCtrlBase::Enable(enable) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if (FindFocus() == this && GetCaret() &&
 | 
			
		||||
        ((enable && !GetCaret()->IsVisible()) ||
 | 
			
		||||
         (!enable && GetCaret()->IsVisible())))
 | 
			
		||||
        ShowCaret(enable);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::CreateCaret()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4387,28 +4387,28 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
                               const wxString& strArg)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // has the text changed as result of this action?
 | 
			
		||||
    bool textChanged = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool textChanged = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the remembered cursor abscissa for multiline text controls is usually
 | 
			
		||||
    // reset after each user action but for ones which do use it (UP and DOWN
 | 
			
		||||
    // for example) we shouldn't do it - as indicated by this flag
 | 
			
		||||
    bool rememberAbscissa = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool rememberAbscissa = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // the command this action corresponds to or NULL if this action doesn't
 | 
			
		||||
    // change text at all or can't be undone
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTextCtrlCommand *command = (wxTextCtrlCommand *)NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxString action;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool del = FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
         sel = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool del = false,
 | 
			
		||||
         sel = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( actionOrig.StartsWith(wxACTION_TEXT_PREFIX_DEL, &action) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( IsEditable() )
 | 
			
		||||
            del = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            del = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( actionOrig.StartsWith(wxACTION_TEXT_PREFIX_SEL, &action) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        sel = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        sel = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // not selection nor delete action
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4448,7 +4448,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( newPos != INVALID_POS_VALUE )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // remember where the cursor original had been
 | 
			
		||||
                rememberAbscissa = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                rememberAbscissa = true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4461,7 +4461,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( newPos != INVALID_POS_VALUE )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // remember where the cursor original had been
 | 
			
		||||
                rememberAbscissa = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                rememberAbscissa = true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4488,7 +4488,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
            // inserting text can be undone
 | 
			
		||||
            command = new wxTextCtrlInsertCommand(strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            textChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            textChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( (action == wxACTION_TEXT_PAGE_UP) ||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4505,7 +4505,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // remember where the cursor original had been
 | 
			
		||||
            rememberAbscissa = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            rememberAbscissa = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            bool goUp = action == wxACTION_TEXT_PAGE_UP;
 | 
			
		||||
            for ( size_t line = 0; line < count; line++ )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4552,7 +4552,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // scroll vertically only
 | 
			
		||||
            Scroll(-1, y);
 | 
			
		||||
            Scroll(wxDefaultCoord, y);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TEXT_SEL_WORD )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4667,7 +4667,7 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
        m_cmdProcessor->Submit(command);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // undoable commands always change text
 | 
			
		||||
        textChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        textChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // no undoable command
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4684,10 +4684,10 @@ bool wxTextCtrl::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& actionOrig,
 | 
			
		||||
        GetEventHandler()->ProcessEvent(event);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // as the text changed...
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isModified = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isModified = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTextCtrl::OnChar(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4762,7 +4762,7 @@ bool wxStdTextCtrlInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // we're only interested in key presses
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !pressed )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    int keycode = event.GetKeyCode();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4875,7 +4875,7 @@ bool wxStdTextCtrlInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        consumer->PerformAction(action, -1, str);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdInputHandler::HandleKey(consumer, event, pressed);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4958,7 +4958,7 @@ wxStdTextCtrlInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // never refresh entirely
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_TEXTCTRL
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ wxThemeInfo::wxThemeInfo(Constructor c,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( ms_theme )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we already have a theme
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxString nameDefTheme;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -121,13 +121,13 @@ wxThemeInfo::wxThemeInfo(Constructor c,
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxLogError(_("Failed to initialize GUI: no built-in themes found."));
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // Set the theme as current.
 | 
			
		||||
    wxTheme::Set(theme);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
/* static */ wxTheme *wxTheme::Set(wxTheme *theme)
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -534,7 +534,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
        wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::Press(scrollbar, doIt);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsAllowedButton(int WXUNUSED(button)) { return TRUE; }
 | 
			
		||||
    virtual bool IsAllowedButton(int WXUNUSED(button)) { return true; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsArrow() const
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1082,7 +1082,7 @@ wxRect wxGTKRenderer::GetBorderDimensions(wxBorder border) const
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxGTKRenderer::AreScrollbarsInsideBorder() const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // no, the scrollbars are outside the border in GTK+
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1405,13 +1405,13 @@ void wxGTKRenderer::DrawRadioBitmap(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
    DrawUpZag(dc, x, xRight, yMid, y);
 | 
			
		||||
    DrawUpZag(dc, x + 1, xRight - 1, yMid, y + 1);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool drawIt = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool drawIt = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( flags & wxCONTROL_CHECKED )
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SetPen(m_penBlack);
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( flags & wxCONTROL_PRESSED )
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SetPen(wxPen(wxSCHEME_COLOUR(m_scheme, CONTROL_PRESSED), 0, wxSOLID));
 | 
			
		||||
    else // unchecked and unpressed
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( drawIt )
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawUpZag(dc, x + 2, xRight - 2, yMid, y + 2);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1424,14 +1424,14 @@ void wxGTKRenderer::DrawRadioBitmap(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
    DrawDownZag(dc, x + 1, xRight - 1, yMid, yBottom - 1);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !(flags & wxCONTROL_CHECKED) )
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = TRUE; // with the same pen
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = true; // with the same pen
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( flags & wxCONTROL_PRESSED )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SetPen(wxPen(wxSCHEME_COLOUR(m_scheme, CONTROL_PRESSED), 0, wxSOLID));
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // checked and unpressed
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        drawIt = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( drawIt )
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawDownZag(dc, x + 2, xRight - 2, yMid, yBottom - 2);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1482,14 +1482,14 @@ wxBitmap wxGTKRenderer::GetCheckBitmap(int flags)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // normal unchecked
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SelectObject(m_bitmapsCheckbox[0][1]);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawUncheckBitmap(dc, rect, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawUncheckBitmap(dc, rect, false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // pressed checked
 | 
			
		||||
        m_bitmapsCheckbox[1][0] = m_bitmapsCheckbox[0][0];
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // pressed unchecked
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.SelectObject(m_bitmapsCheckbox[1][1]);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawUncheckBitmap(dc, rect, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawUncheckBitmap(dc, rect, true);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    int row = flags & wxCONTROL_PRESSED ? 1 : 0;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ void wxGTKRenderer::DoDrawCheckOrRadioBitmap(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
        rectLabel.SetRight(rect.GetRight());
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bitmap, xBmp, yBmp, TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bitmap, xBmp, yBmp, true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    DrawLabel(dc, label, rectLabel, flags,
 | 
			
		||||
              wxALIGN_LEFT | wxALIGN_CENTRE_VERTICAL, indexAccel);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2823,7 +2823,7 @@ wxSize wxGTKRenderer::GetFrameMinSize(int WXUNUSED(flags)) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxSize wxGTKRenderer::GetFrameIconSize() const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxSize(-1, -1);
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxSize(wxDefaultCoord, wxDefaultCoord);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4476,7 +4476,7 @@ bool wxGTKInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer * WXUNUSED(control),
 | 
			
		||||
                                  const wxKeyEvent& WXUNUSED(event),
 | 
			
		||||
                                  bool WXUNUSED(pressed))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxGTKInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4487,10 +4487,10 @@ bool wxGTKInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        control->GetInputWindow()->SetFocus();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxGTKInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4498,18 +4498,18 @@ bool wxGTKInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( event.Entering() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        control->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        control->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(true);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( event.Leaving() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        control->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
        control->GetInputWindow()->SetCurrent(false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4527,11 +4527,11 @@ bool wxGTKCheckboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            control->PerformAction(wxACTION_CHECKBOX_TOGGLE);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4621,7 +4621,7 @@ bool wxGTKTextCtrlInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            control->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawShadedRect(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect,
 | 
			
		||||
                        const wxPen& pen1, const wxPen& pen2);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrowBorder(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect, bool isPressed = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrowBorder(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect, bool isPressed = false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrow(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect,
 | 
			
		||||
                   wxArrowDirection arrowDir, wxArrowStyle arrowStyle);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -575,7 +575,7 @@ void wxMetalRenderer::DrawArrow(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
        x--;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw it
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -443,7 +443,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawSunkenBorder(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw the border used for scrollbar arrows
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrowBorder(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect, bool isPressed = FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrowBorder(wxDC& dc, wxRect *rect, bool isPressed = false);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // public DrawArrow()s helper
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawArrow(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -469,7 +469,7 @@ protected:
 | 
			
		||||
    void DrawLine(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
                  wxCoord x1, wxCoord y1,
 | 
			
		||||
                  wxCoord x2, wxCoord y2,
 | 
			
		||||
                  bool transpose = FALSE)
 | 
			
		||||
                  bool transpose = false)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( transpose )
 | 
			
		||||
            dc.DrawLine(y1, x1, y2, x2);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -1917,7 +1917,7 @@ wxRect wxWin32Renderer::GetBorderDimensions(wxBorder border) const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWin32Renderer::AreScrollbarsInsideBorder() const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2284,7 +2284,7 @@ void wxWin32Renderer::DrawCheckItem(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, rect.x, rect.y + (rect.height - bmp.GetHeight()) / 2 - 1,
 | 
			
		||||
                  TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
                  true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxRect rectLabel = rect;
 | 
			
		||||
    int bmpWidth = bmp.GetWidth();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -2365,7 +2365,7 @@ void wxWin32Renderer::DrawCheckOrRadioButton(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
        rectLabel.SetRight(rect.GetRight());
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bitmap, xBmp, yBmp, TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bitmap, xBmp, yBmp, true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    DoDrawLabel(
 | 
			
		||||
                dc, label, rectLabel,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3418,7 +3418,7 @@ void wxWin32Renderer::DrawArrow(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
        x--;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // draw it
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, TRUE /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
    dc.DrawBitmap(bmp, x, y, true /* use mask */);
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxWin32Renderer::DrawArrowButton(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -3768,14 +3768,14 @@ void wxWin32Renderer::DrawFrameButton(wxDC& dc,
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawShadedRect(dc, &r, m_penBlack, m_penHighlight);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawShadedRect(dc, &r, m_penDarkGrey, m_penLightGrey);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawBackground(dc, wxSCHEME_COLOUR(m_scheme, CONTROL), r);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.DrawBitmap(m_bmpFrameButtons[idx], r.x+1, r.y+1, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.DrawBitmap(m_bmpFrameButtons[idx], r.x+1, r.y+1, true);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawShadedRect(dc, &r, m_penHighlight, m_penBlack);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawShadedRect(dc, &r, m_penLightGrey, m_penDarkGrey);
 | 
			
		||||
        DrawBackground(dc, wxSCHEME_COLOUR(m_scheme, CONTROL), r);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.DrawBitmap(m_bmpFrameButtons[idx], r.x, r.y, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
        dc.DrawBitmap(m_bmpFrameButtons[idx], r.x, r.y, true);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4163,7 +4163,7 @@ bool wxWin32InputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer * WXUNUSED(control),
 | 
			
		||||
                                    const wxKeyEvent& WXUNUSED(event),
 | 
			
		||||
                                    bool WXUNUSED(pressed))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWin32InputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4179,11 +4179,11 @@ bool wxWin32InputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            win->SetFocus();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4195,7 +4195,7 @@ wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler(wxWin32Renderer *renderer,
 | 
			
		||||
                             wxInputHandler *handler)
 | 
			
		||||
        : wxStdScrollBarInputHandler(renderer, handler)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_scrollPaused = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_scrollPaused = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_interval = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4204,7 +4204,7 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::OnScrollTimer(wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // stop if went beyond the position of the original click (this can only
 | 
			
		||||
    // happen when we scroll by pages)
 | 
			
		||||
    bool stop = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool stop = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( action == wxACTION_SCROLL_PAGE_DOWN )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        stop = m_renderer->HitTestScrollbar(scrollbar, m_ptStartScrolling)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4222,7 +4222,7 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::OnScrollTimer(wxScrollBar *scrollbar,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        scrollbar->Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return wxStdScrollBarInputHandler::OnScrollTimer(scrollbar, action);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4255,12 +4255,12 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
    // mouse move events normally - only do it while mouse is captured (i.e.
 | 
			
		||||
    // when we're dragging the thumb or pressing on something)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !m_winCapture )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( event.Entering() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // we're not interested in this at all
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxScrollBar *scrollbar = wxStaticCast(control->GetInputWindow(), wxScrollBar);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4272,20 +4272,20 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( event.Leaving() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // it surely didn't
 | 
			
		||||
            return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        ht = m_renderer->HitTestScrollbar(scrollbar, event.GetPosition());
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( ht == m_htLast )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // yes it did, resume scrolling
 | 
			
		||||
            m_scrollPaused = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_scrollPaused = false;
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_timerScroll )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                // we were scrolling by line/page, restart timer
 | 
			
		||||
                m_timerScroll->Start(m_interval);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                Press(scrollbar, TRUE);
 | 
			
		||||
                Press(scrollbar, true);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else // we were dragging the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4293,7 +4293,7 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
                HandleThumbMove(scrollbar, m_eventLastDrag);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else // normal case, scrolling hasn't been paused
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4345,10 +4345,10 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
                // pause scrolling
 | 
			
		||||
                m_interval = m_timerScroll->GetInterval();
 | 
			
		||||
                m_timerScroll->Stop();
 | 
			
		||||
                m_scrollPaused = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                m_scrollPaused = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // unpress the arrow
 | 
			
		||||
                Press(scrollbar, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                Press(scrollbar, false);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else // we were dragging the thumb
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4361,7 +4361,7 @@ bool wxWin32ScrollBarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
                HandleThumbMove(scrollbar, m_eventStartDrag);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4398,15 +4398,15 @@ bool wxWin32CheckboxInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !!action )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !action.IsEmpty() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            control->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4440,7 +4440,7 @@ bool wxWin32TextCtrlInputHandler::HandleKey(wxInputConsumer *control,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            control->PerformAction(action);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4455,7 +4455,7 @@ wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::
 | 
			
		||||
wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler(wxInputHandler *handler)
 | 
			
		||||
    : wxStdInputHandler(handler)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isOnGrip = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isOnGrip = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::IsOnGrip(wxWindow *statbar,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4467,7 +4467,7 @@ bool wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::IsOnGrip(wxWindow *statbar,
 | 
			
		||||
        wxTopLevelWindow *
 | 
			
		||||
            parentTLW = wxDynamicCast(statbar->GetParent(), wxTopLevelWindow);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( parentTLW, FALSE,
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( parentTLW, false,
 | 
			
		||||
                     _T("the status bar should be a child of a TLW") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // a maximized window can't be resized anyhow
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4485,7 +4485,7 @@ bool wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::IsOnGrip(wxWindow *statbar,
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4508,7 +4508,7 @@ bool wxWin32StatusBarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    statbar->SetCursor(m_cursorOld);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4673,7 +4673,7 @@ bool wxWin32FrameInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            tlw->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_CLICK,
 | 
			
		||||
                               tlw->IsMaximized() ? wxTOPLEVEL_BUTTON_RESTORE
 | 
			
		||||
                                                  : wxTOPLEVEL_BUTTON_MAXIMIZE);
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else if ( tlw->GetWindowStyle() & wxSYSTEM_MENU )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4683,7 +4683,7 @@ bool wxWin32FrameInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                       hit == wxHT_TOPLEVEL_ICON)) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                PopupSystemMenu(tlw, event.GetPosition());
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -4712,13 +4712,13 @@ void wxWin32FrameInputHandler::PopupSystemMenu(wxTopLevelWindow *window,
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( window->IsMaximized() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_MAXIMIZE_FRAME, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_MOVE_FRAME, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_MAXIMIZE_FRAME, false);
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_MOVE_FRAME, false);
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( window->GetWindowStyle() & wxRESIZE_BORDER )
 | 
			
		||||
                menu->Enable(wxID_RESIZE_FRAME, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                menu->Enable(wxID_RESIZE_FRAME, false);
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_RESTORE_FRAME, FALSE);
 | 
			
		||||
            menu->Enable(wxID_RESTORE_FRAME, false);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    window->PopupMenu(menu, pos);
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// value meaning that m_widthSeparator is not initialized
 | 
			
		||||
static const wxCoord INVALID_WIDTH = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
static const wxCoord INVALID_WIDTH = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
// wxToolBarTool: our implementation of wxToolBarToolBase
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -71,15 +71,15 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no position yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_x =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_y = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_y = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_width =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_height = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // not pressed yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isInverted = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isInverted = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        // mouse not here yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_underMouse = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_underMouse = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxToolBarTool(wxToolBar *tbar, wxControl *control)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -87,15 +87,15 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        // no position yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_x =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_y = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_y = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_width =
 | 
			
		||||
        m_height = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        // not pressed yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isInverted = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_isInverted = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        // mouse not here yet
 | 
			
		||||
        m_underMouse = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_underMouse = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // is this tool pressed, even temporarily? (this is different from being
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    void Invert() { m_isInverted = !m_isInverted; }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    // Set underMouse
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetUnderMouse( bool under = TRUE ) { m_underMouse = under; }
 | 
			
		||||
    void SetUnderMouse( bool under = true ) { m_underMouse = under; }
 | 
			
		||||
    bool IsUnderMouse() { return m_underMouse; }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
public:
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -121,10 +121,10 @@ public:
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord m_height;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
private:
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE if the tool is pressed
 | 
			
		||||
    // true if the tool is pressed
 | 
			
		||||
    bool m_isInverted;
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    // TRUE if the tool is under the mouse
 | 
			
		||||
    // true if the tool is under the mouse
 | 
			
		||||
    bool m_underMouse;
 | 
			
		||||
};
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ IMPLEMENT_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxToolBar, wxControl);
 | 
			
		||||
void wxToolBar::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // no tools yet
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // unknown widths for the tools and separators
 | 
			
		||||
    m_widthSeparator = INVALID_WIDTH;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -165,14 +165,14 @@ bool wxToolBar::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxToolBarBase::Create(parent, id, pos, size, style,
 | 
			
		||||
                                wxDefaultValidator, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    CreateInputHandler(wxINP_HANDLER_TOOLBAR);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(size);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
wxToolBar::~wxToolBar()
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -245,23 +245,23 @@ bool wxToolBar::DoInsertTool(size_t WXUNUSED(pos),
 | 
			
		||||
                             wxToolBarToolBase * WXUNUSED(tool))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // recalculate the toolbar geometry before redrawing it the next time
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // and ensure that we indeed are going to redraw
 | 
			
		||||
    Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxToolBar::DoDeleteTool(size_t WXUNUSED(pos),
 | 
			
		||||
                             wxToolBarToolBase * WXUNUSED(tool))
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    // as above
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxToolBar::DoEnableTool(wxToolBarToolBase *tool, bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -420,21 +420,21 @@ wxRect wxToolBar::GetToolRect(wxToolBarToolBase *toolBase) const
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxToolBar::Realize()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxToolBarBase::Realize() )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    DoLayout();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    SetBestSize(wxDefaultSize);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxToolBar::DoLayout()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxASSERT_MSG( m_needsLayout, _T("why are we called?") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_needsLayout = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    wxCoord x = m_xMargin,
 | 
			
		||||
            y = m_yMargin;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -496,14 +496,14 @@ void wxToolBar::DoSetSize(int x, int y, int width, int height, int sizeFlags)
 | 
			
		||||
    wxToolBarBase::DoSetSize(x, y, width, height, sizeFlags);
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    // Correct width and height if needed.
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( width == -1 || height == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( width == wxDefaultCoord || height == wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        int tmp_width, tmp_height;
 | 
			
		||||
        GetSize(&tmp_width, &tmp_height);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( width == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( width == wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
            width = tmp_width;
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( height == -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( height == wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
            height = tmp_height;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
  
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -685,17 +685,17 @@ bool wxToolBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else // simple non-checkable tool
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            isToggled = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            isToggled = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        OnLeftClick( tool->GetId(), isToggled );
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOOLBAR_ENTER )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( tool, FALSE, _T("no tool to enter?") );
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( tool, false, _T("no tool to enter?") );
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( HasFlag(wxTB_FLAT) && tool->IsEnabled() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            tool->SetUnderMouse( TRUE );
 | 
			
		||||
            tool->SetUnderMouse( true );
 | 
			
		||||
            
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( !tool->IsToggled() )
 | 
			
		||||
                RefreshTool( tool );
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -703,11 +703,11 @@ bool wxToolBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOOLBAR_LEAVE )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( tool, FALSE, _T("no tool to leave?") );
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCHECK_MSG( tool, false, _T("no tool to leave?") );
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( HasFlag(wxTB_FLAT) && tool->IsEnabled() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            tool->SetUnderMouse( FALSE );
 | 
			
		||||
            tool->SetUnderMouse( false );
 | 
			
		||||
            
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( !tool->IsToggled() )
 | 
			
		||||
                RefreshTool( tool );
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ bool wxToolBar::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return wxControl::PerformAction(action, numArg, strArg);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ============================================================================
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -752,7 +752,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( event.LeftDown() || event.LeftDClick() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( !tool || !tool->IsEnabled() )
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
                
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winCapture = tbar;
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winCapture->CaptureMouse();
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            consumer->PerformAction( wxACTION_BUTTON_PRESS, tool->GetId() );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else if ( event.LeftUp() )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            
 | 
			
		||||
            m_toolCapture = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
                
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        //else: don't do anything special about the double click
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                tool = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
                
 | 
			
		||||
            if (tool == m_toolLast)
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
                
 | 
			
		||||
            if (tool)
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction( wxACTION_BUTTON_PRESS, m_toolCapture->GetId() );
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -827,7 +827,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            if (tool == m_toolLast)
 | 
			
		||||
               return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
               return true;
 | 
			
		||||
               
 | 
			
		||||
            if (m_toolLast)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -844,10 +844,10 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
            m_toolLast = tool;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -859,7 +859,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleFocus(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        consumer->PerformAction( wxACTION_TOOLBAR_LEAVE, m_toolCapture->GetId() );
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -871,7 +871,7 @@ bool wxStdToolbarInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
        consumer->PerformAction( wxACTION_TOOLBAR_LEAVE, m_toolCapture->GetId() );
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#endif // wxUSE_TOOLBAR
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ int wxTopLevelWindow::ms_canIconize = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTopLevelWindow::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isActive = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isActive = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_windowStyle = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_pressedButton = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ bool wxTopLevelWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxTopLevelWindowNative::Create(parent, id, title, pos,
 | 
			
		||||
                                         size, style, name) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( ms_drawDecorations )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -116,12 +116,12 @@ bool wxTopLevelWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
        m_exStyle = exstyleOrig;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxTopLevelWindow::ShowFullScreen(bool show, long style)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( show == IsFullScreen() ) return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( show == IsFullScreen() ) return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( ms_drawDecorations )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ void wxTopLevelWindow::SetIcons(const wxIconBundle& icons)
 | 
			
		||||
        wxSize size = m_renderer->GetFrameIconSize();
 | 
			
		||||
        const wxIcon& icon = icons.GetIcon( size );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !icon.Ok() || size.x == -1  )
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( !icon.Ok() || size.x == wxDefaultCoord  )
 | 
			
		||||
            m_titlebarIcon = icon;
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -353,16 +353,16 @@ static bool wxGetResizingCursor(long hitTestResult, wxCursor& cursor)
 | 
			
		||||
                cursor = wxCursor(wxCURSOR_SIZENWSE);
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
            default:
 | 
			
		||||
                return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return false;
 | 
			
		||||
                #if 0
 | 
			
		||||
                // not rachable due to earlier return
 | 
			
		||||
                break;
 | 
			
		||||
                #endif
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
#define wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_DIR \
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -426,25 +426,25 @@ void wxApplyResize(wxInteractiveMoveData& data, const wxPoint& diff)
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_rect.height += diff.y;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_minSize.x != -1 && data.m_rect.width < data.m_minSize.x )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_minSize.x != wxDefaultCoord && data.m_rect.width < data.m_minSize.x )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_W )
 | 
			
		||||
            data.m_rect.x -= data.m_minSize.x - data.m_rect.width;
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_rect.width = data.m_minSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_maxSize.x != -1 && data.m_rect.width > data.m_maxSize.x )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_maxSize.x != wxDefaultCoord && data.m_rect.width > data.m_maxSize.x )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_W )
 | 
			
		||||
            data.m_rect.x -= data.m_minSize.x - data.m_rect.width;
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_rect.width = data.m_maxSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_minSize.y != -1 && data.m_rect.height < data.m_minSize.y )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_minSize.y != wxDefaultCoord && data.m_rect.height < data.m_minSize.y )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_N )
 | 
			
		||||
            data.m_rect.y -= data.m_minSize.y - data.m_rect.height;
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_rect.height = data.m_minSize.y;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_maxSize.y != -1 && data.m_rect.height > data.m_maxSize.y )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( data.m_maxSize.y != wxDefaultCoord && data.m_rect.height > data.m_maxSize.y )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_N )
 | 
			
		||||
            data.m_rect.y -= data.m_minSize.y - data.m_rect.height;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -484,7 +484,7 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnMouseDown(wxMouseEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    wxPoint diff(-1,-1);
 | 
			
		||||
    wxPoint diff(wxDefaultCoord,wxDefaultCoord);
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    switch ( event.GetKeyCode() )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            return;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( diff.x != -1 )
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( diff.x != wxDefaultCoord )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( m_data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_WAIT_FOR_INPUT )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -509,7 +509,7 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_data.m_sizingCursor )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                wxEndBusyCursor();
 | 
			
		||||
                m_data.m_sizingCursor = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                m_data.m_sizingCursor = false;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_MOVE )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -520,7 +520,7 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        wxPoint warp;
 | 
			
		||||
        bool changeCur = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        bool changeCur = false;
 | 
			
		||||
        
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( m_data.m_flags & wxINTERACTIVE_MOVE )
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -537,14 +537,14 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_flags |= wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_N;
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_pos.y = m_data.m_window->GetPosition().y;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
                else if ( diff.y > 0 )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_flags |= wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_S;
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_pos.y = m_data.m_window->GetPosition().y +
 | 
			
		||||
                                     m_data.m_window->GetSize().y;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( !(m_data.m_flags & 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -554,14 +554,14 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_flags |= wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_W;
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_pos.x = m_data.m_window->GetPosition().x;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
                else if ( diff.x > 0 )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_flags |= wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_E;
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_data.m_pos.x = m_data.m_window->GetPosition().x +
 | 
			
		||||
                                     m_data.m_window->GetSize().x;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    changeCur = true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -595,7 +595,7 @@ void wxInteractiveMoveHandler::OnKeyDown(wxKeyEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( m_data.m_sizingCursor )
 | 
			
		||||
                    wxEndBusyCursor();
 | 
			
		||||
                wxBeginBusyCursor(&cur);
 | 
			
		||||
                m_data.m_sizingCursor = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                m_data.m_sizingCursor = true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -627,11 +627,11 @@ void wxTopLevelWindow::InteractiveMove(int flags)
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxCursor sizingCursor(wxCURSOR_SIZING);
 | 
			
		||||
        wxBeginBusyCursor(&sizingCursor);
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_sizingCursor = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_sizingCursor = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_sizingCursor = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        data.m_sizingCursor = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    data.m_window = this;
 | 
			
		||||
    data.m_evtLoop = &loop;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -705,21 +705,21 @@ bool wxTopLevelWindow::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
            m_isActive = isActive;
 | 
			
		||||
            RefreshTitleBar();
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_PRESS )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_pressedButton = numArg;
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTitleBar();
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_RELEASE )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        m_pressedButton = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTitleBar();
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_CLICK )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -727,13 +727,13 @@ bool wxTopLevelWindow::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        m_pressedButton = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
        RefreshTitleBar();
 | 
			
		||||
        ClickTitleBarButton(numArg);
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_MOVE )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        InteractiveMove(wxINTERACTIVE_MOVE);
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( action == wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_RESIZE )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -748,16 +748,16 @@ bool wxTopLevelWindow::PerformAction(const wxControlAction& action,
 | 
			
		||||
        if ( numArg & wxHT_TOPLEVEL_BORDER_E )
 | 
			
		||||
            flags |= wxINTERACTIVE_RESIZE_E;
 | 
			
		||||
        InteractiveMove(flags);
 | 
			
		||||
        return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return true;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    else
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxTopLevelWindow::OnSystemMenu(wxCommandEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ret = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool ret = true;
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    switch (event.GetId())
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -785,7 +785,7 @@ void wxTopLevelWindow::OnSystemMenu(wxCommandEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
            break;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        default:
 | 
			
		||||
            ret = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
            ret = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !ret )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -803,7 +803,7 @@ wxStdFrameInputHandler::wxStdFrameInputHandler(wxInputHandler *inphand)
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winCapture = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winHitTest = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_winPressed = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_borderCursorOn = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_borderCursorOn = false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -831,18 +831,18 @@ bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                m_winHitTest = hit;
 | 
			
		||||
                m_winPressed = hit;
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_PRESS, m_winPressed);
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if ( (hit & wxHT_TOPLEVEL_TITLEBAR) && !w->IsMaximized() )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_MOVE);
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if ( (consumer->GetInputWindow()->GetWindowStyle() & wxRESIZE_BORDER)
 | 
			
		||||
                      && (hit & wxHT_TOPLEVEL_ANY_BORDER) )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_RESIZE, hit);
 | 
			
		||||
                return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                return true;
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -856,7 +856,7 @@ bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleMouse(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( m_winHitTest == m_winPressed )
 | 
			
		||||
                {
 | 
			
		||||
                    consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_CLICK, m_winPressed);
 | 
			
		||||
                    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
                }
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            //else: the mouse was released outside the window, this doesn't
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
                consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_BUTTON_PRESS, m_winPressed);
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            m_winHitTest = hit;
 | 
			
		||||
            return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            return true;
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    else if ( consumer->GetInputWindow()->GetWindowStyle() & wxRESIZE_BORDER )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleMouseMove(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( m_borderCursorOn )
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
                m_borderCursorOn = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
                m_borderCursorOn = false;
 | 
			
		||||
                win->SetCursor(m_origCursor);
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -924,8 +924,8 @@ bool wxStdFrameInputHandler::HandleActivation(wxInputConsumer *consumer,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( m_borderCursorOn )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        consumer->GetInputWindow()->SetCursor(m_origCursor);
 | 
			
		||||
        m_borderCursorOn = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        m_borderCursorOn = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    consumer->PerformAction(wxACTION_TOPLEVEL_ACTIVATE, activated);
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -106,12 +106,12 @@ void wxWindow::Init()
 | 
			
		||||
    m_scrollbarVert =
 | 
			
		||||
    m_scrollbarHorz = (wxScrollBar *)NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isCurrent = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isCurrent = false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_renderer = wxTheme::Get()->GetRenderer();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_oldSize.x = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_oldSize.y = -1;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_oldSize.x = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
    m_oldSize.y = wxDefaultCoord;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ bool wxWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 actualStyle | wxCLIP_CHILDREN,
 | 
			
		||||
                                 name) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // Set full style again, including those we didn't want present
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -146,13 +146,13 @@ bool wxWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( style & wxALWAYS_SHOW_SB )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( TRUE );
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( true );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
        m_scrollbarVert = new wxScrollBar(this, -1,
 | 
			
		||||
        m_scrollbarVert = new wxScrollBar(this, wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                                          wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                                          wxSB_VERTICAL);
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( FALSE );
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( false );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -160,13 +160,13 @@ bool wxWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( style & wxHSCROLL )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( TRUE );
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( true );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
        m_scrollbarHorz = new wxScrollBar(this, -1,
 | 
			
		||||
        m_scrollbarHorz = new wxScrollBar(this, wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                                          wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                                          wxSB_HORIZONTAL);
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( FALSE );
 | 
			
		||||
        SetInsertIntoMain( false );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
    
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -176,7 +176,7 @@ bool wxWindow::Create(wxWindow *parent,
 | 
			
		||||
        PositionScrollbars();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ bool wxWindow::DoDrawBackground(wxDC& dc)
 | 
			
		||||
        EraseBackground( dc, rect );
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
void wxWindow::EraseBackground(wxDC& dc, const wxRect& rect)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ void wxWindow::Refresh(bool eraseBackground, const wxRect *rectClient)
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // debugging helper
 | 
			
		||||
#ifdef WXDEBUG_REFRESH
 | 
			
		||||
    static bool s_refreshDebug = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    static bool s_refreshDebug = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( s_refreshDebug )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        wxWindowDC dc(this);
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -442,7 +442,7 @@ void wxWindow::Refresh(bool eraseBackground, const wxRect *rectClient)
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( !wxWindowNative::Enable(enable) )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // disabled window can't keep focus
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( FindFocus() == this && GetParent() != NULL )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ bool wxWindow::Enable(bool enable)
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::IsFocused() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -468,12 +468,12 @@ bool wxWindow::IsFocused() const
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::IsPressed() const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::IsDefault() const
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return false;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::IsCurrent() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -484,14 +484,14 @@ bool wxWindow::IsCurrent() const
 | 
			
		||||
bool wxWindow::SetCurrent(bool doit)
 | 
			
		||||
{
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( doit == m_isCurrent )
 | 
			
		||||
        return FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
        return false;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    m_isCurrent = doit;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( CanBeHighlighted() )
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    return TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
    return true;
 | 
			
		||||
}
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
int wxWindow::GetStateFlags() const
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
        // area.
 | 
			
		||||
        wxSize newSize = event.GetSize();
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
        if (m_oldSize.x == -1 && m_oldSize.y == -1)
 | 
			
		||||
        if (m_oldSize.x == wxDefaultCoord && m_oldSize.y == wxDefaultCoord)
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            m_oldSize = newSize;
 | 
			
		||||
            return;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = m_oldSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.y = m_oldSize.y-2;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = 1;
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if (newSize.y < m_oldSize.y)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.x = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = 1;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = newSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            if (newSize.x > m_oldSize.x)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -574,7 +574,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = m_oldSize.y;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.x = m_oldSize.x-2;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = 1;
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if (newSize.x < m_oldSize.x)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.y = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = 1;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = newSize.y;
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
        else
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -596,7 +596,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = m_oldSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.y = m_oldSize.y-4;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = 2;
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if (newSize.y < m_oldSize.y)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -605,7 +605,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.x = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = 2;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = newSize.x;
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            if (newSize.x > m_oldSize.x)
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = m_oldSize.y;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.x = m_oldSize.x-4;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = 2;
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
            else if (newSize.x < m_oldSize.x)
 | 
			
		||||
            {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -624,7 +624,7 @@ void wxWindow::OnSize(wxSizeEvent& event)
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.y = 0;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.width = 2;
 | 
			
		||||
                rect.height = newSize.y;
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( TRUE, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
                wxWindowNative::Refresh( true, &rect );
 | 
			
		||||
            }
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ void wxWindow::SetScrollbar(int orient,
 | 
			
		||||
    wxASSERT_MSG( pageSize <= range,
 | 
			
		||||
                    _T("page size can't be greater than range") );
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    bool hasClientSizeChanged = FALSE;
 | 
			
		||||
    bool hasClientSizeChanged = false;
 | 
			
		||||
    wxScrollBar *scrollbar = GetScrollbar(orient);
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( range && (pageSize < range) )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -849,14 +849,14 @@ void wxWindow::SetScrollbar(int orient,
 | 
			
		||||
        {
 | 
			
		||||
            // create it
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
            SetInsertIntoMain( TRUE );
 | 
			
		||||
            SetInsertIntoMain( true );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
            scrollbar = new wxScrollBar(this, -1,
 | 
			
		||||
            scrollbar = new wxScrollBar(this, wxID_ANY,
 | 
			
		||||
                                        wxDefaultPosition, wxDefaultSize,
 | 
			
		||||
                                        orient & wxVERTICAL ? wxSB_VERTICAL
 | 
			
		||||
                                                            : wxSB_HORIZONTAL);
 | 
			
		||||
#if wxUSE_TWO_WINDOWS
 | 
			
		||||
            SetInsertIntoMain( FALSE );
 | 
			
		||||
            SetInsertIntoMain( false );
 | 
			
		||||
#endif
 | 
			
		||||
            if ( orient & wxVERTICAL )
 | 
			
		||||
                m_scrollbarVert = scrollbar;
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ void wxWindow::SetScrollbar(int orient,
 | 
			
		||||
                m_scrollbarHorz = scrollbar;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            // the client area diminished as we created a scrollbar
 | 
			
		||||
            hasClientSizeChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
            hasClientSizeChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
            PositionScrollbars();
 | 
			
		||||
        }
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -897,7 +897,7 @@ void wxWindow::SetScrollbar(int orient,
 | 
			
		||||
                    m_scrollbarHorz = NULL;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // the client area increased as we removed a scrollbar
 | 
			
		||||
                hasClientSizeChanged = TRUE;
 | 
			
		||||
                hasClientSizeChanged = true;
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
                // the size of the remaining scrollbar must be adjusted
 | 
			
		||||
                if ( m_scrollbarHorz || m_scrollbarVert )
 | 
			
		||||
@@ -971,13 +971,13 @@ void wxWindow::ScrollWindow(int dx, int dy, const wxRect *rect)
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( dx )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        r = ScrollNoRefresh(dx, 0, rect);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(TRUE /* erase bkgnd */, &r);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(true /* erase bkgnd */, &r);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    if ( dy )
 | 
			
		||||
    {
 | 
			
		||||
        r = ScrollNoRefresh(0, dy, rect);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(TRUE /* erase bkgnd */, &r);
 | 
			
		||||
        Refresh(true /* erase bkgnd */, &r);
 | 
			
		||||
    }
 | 
			
		||||
 | 
			
		||||
    // scroll children accordingly:
 | 
			
		||||
 
 | 
			
		||||
		Reference in New Issue
	
	Block a user